|
1 %% |
|
2 %% IEEEtran.cls 2007/03/05 version V1.7a |
|
3 %% |
|
4 %% |
|
5 %% This is the official IEEE LaTeX class for authors of the Institute of |
|
6 %% Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Transactions journals and |
|
7 %% conferences. |
|
8 %% |
|
9 %% Support sites: |
|
10 %% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/ |
|
11 %% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/ |
|
12 %% and |
|
13 %% http://www.ieee.org/ |
|
14 %% |
|
15 %% Based on the original 1993 IEEEtran.cls, but with many bug fixes |
|
16 %% and enhancements (from both JVH and MDS) over the 1996/7 version. |
|
17 %% |
|
18 %% |
|
19 %% Contributors: |
|
20 %% Gerry Murray (1993), Silvano Balemi (1993), |
|
21 %% Jon Dixon (1996), Peter N"uchter (1996), |
|
22 %% Juergen von Hagen (2000), and Michael Shell (2001-2007) |
|
23 %% |
|
24 %% |
|
25 %% Copyright (c) 1993-2000 by Gerry Murray, Silvano Balemi, |
|
26 %% Jon Dixon, Peter N"uchter, |
|
27 %% Juergen von Hagen |
|
28 %% and |
|
29 %% Copyright (c) 2001-2007 by Michael Shell |
|
30 %% |
|
31 %% Current maintainer (V1.3 to V1.7): Michael Shell |
|
32 %% See: |
|
33 %% http://www.michaelshell.org/ |
|
34 %% for current contact information. |
|
35 %% |
|
36 %% Special thanks to Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau |
|
37 %% for allowing the inclusion of the \@ifmtarg command |
|
38 %% from their ifmtarg LaTeX package. |
|
39 %% |
|
40 %%************************************************************************* |
|
41 %% Legal Notice: |
|
42 %% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or |
|
43 %% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or |
|
44 %% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! |
|
45 %% User assumes all risk. |
|
46 %% In no event shall IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for |
|
47 %% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental, |
|
48 %% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse |
|
49 %% of any information contained here. |
|
50 %% |
|
51 %% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not |
|
52 %% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE. |
|
53 %% |
|
54 %% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) |
|
55 %% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used, |
|
56 %% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included |
|
57 %% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released |
|
58 %% 2003/12/01 or later. |
|
59 %% Retain all contribution notices and credits. |
|
60 %% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including ** |
|
61 %% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. ** |
|
62 %% |
|
63 %% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex, |
|
64 %% bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex |
|
65 %% |
|
66 %% Major changes to the user interface should be indicated by an |
|
67 %% increase in the version numbers. If a version is a beta, it will |
|
68 %% be indicated with a BETA suffix, i.e., 1.4 BETA. |
|
69 %% Small changes can be indicated by appending letters to the version |
|
70 %% such as "IEEEtran_v14a.cls". |
|
71 %% In all cases, \Providesclass, any \typeout messages to the user, |
|
72 %% \IEEEtransversionmajor and \IEEEtransversionminor must reflect the |
|
73 %% correct version information. |
|
74 %% The changes should also be documented via source comments. |
|
75 %%************************************************************************* |
|
76 %% |
|
77 % |
|
78 % Available class options |
|
79 % e.g., \documentclass[10pt,conference]{IEEEtran} |
|
80 % |
|
81 % *** choose only one from each category *** |
|
82 % |
|
83 % 9pt, 10pt, 11pt, 12pt |
|
84 % Sets normal font size. The default is 10pt. |
|
85 % |
|
86 % conference, journal, technote, peerreview, peerreviewca |
|
87 % determines format mode - conference papers, journal papers, |
|
88 % correspondence papers (technotes), or peer review papers. The user |
|
89 % should also select 9pt when using technote. peerreview is like |
|
90 % journal mode, but provides for a single-column "cover" title page for |
|
91 % anonymous peer review. The paper title (without the author names) is |
|
92 % repeated at the top of the page after the cover page. For peer review |
|
93 % papers, the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle command must be executed (will |
|
94 % automatically be ignored for non-peerreview modes) at the place the |
|
95 % cover page is to end, usually just after the abstract (keywords are |
|
96 % not normally used with peer review papers). peerreviewca is like |
|
97 % peerreview, but allows the author names to be entered and formatted |
|
98 % as with conference mode so that author affiliation and contact |
|
99 % information can be easily seen on the cover page. |
|
100 % The default is journal. |
|
101 % |
|
102 % draft, draftcls, draftclsnofoot, final |
|
103 % determines if paper is formatted as a widely spaced draft (for |
|
104 % handwritten editor comments) or as a properly typeset final version. |
|
105 % draftcls restricts draft mode to the class file while all other LaTeX |
|
106 % packages (i.e., \usepackage{graphicx}) will behave as final - allows |
|
107 % for a draft paper with visible figures, etc. draftclsnofoot is like |
|
108 % draftcls, but does not display the date and the word "DRAFT" at the foot |
|
109 % of the pages. If using one of the draft modes, the user will probably |
|
110 % also want to select onecolumn. |
|
111 % The default is final. |
|
112 % |
|
113 % letterpaper, a4paper |
|
114 % determines paper size: 8.5in X 11in or 210mm X 297mm. CHANGING THE PAPER |
|
115 % SIZE WILL NOT ALTER THE TYPESETTING OF THE DOCUMENT - ONLY THE MARGINS |
|
116 % WILL BE AFFECTED. In particular, documents using the a4paper option will |
|
117 % have reduced side margins (A4 is narrower than US letter) and a longer |
|
118 % bottom margin (A4 is longer than US letter). For both cases, the top |
|
119 % margins will be the same and the text will be horizontally centered. |
|
120 % For final submission to IEEE, authors should use US letter (8.5 X 11in) |
|
121 % paper. Note that authors should ensure that all post-processing |
|
122 % (ps, pdf, etc.) uses the same paper specificiation as the .tex document. |
|
123 % Problems here are by far the number one reason for incorrect margins. |
|
124 % IEEEtran will automatically set the default paper size under pdflatex |
|
125 % (without requiring a change to pdftex.cfg), so this issue is more |
|
126 % important to dvips users. Fix config.ps, config.pdf, or ~/.dvipsrc for |
|
127 % dvips, or use the dvips -t papersize option instead as needed. See the |
|
128 % testflow documentation |
|
129 % http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/testflow |
|
130 % for more details on dvips paper size configuration. |
|
131 % The default is letterpaper. |
|
132 % |
|
133 % oneside, twoside |
|
134 % determines if layout follows single sided or two sided (duplex) |
|
135 % printing. The only notable change is with the headings at the top of |
|
136 % the pages. |
|
137 % The default is oneside. |
|
138 % |
|
139 % onecolumn, twocolumn |
|
140 % determines if text is organized into one or two columns per page. One |
|
141 % column mode is usually used only with draft papers. |
|
142 % The default is twocolumn. |
|
143 % |
|
144 % compsoc |
|
145 % Use the format of the IEEE Computer Society. |
|
146 % |
|
147 % compsocconf |
|
148 % Use the format of IEEE Computer Society conferencs (CPS) |
|
149 % |
|
150 % romanappendices |
|
151 % Use the "Appendix I" convention when numbering appendices. IEEEtran.cls |
|
152 % now defaults to Alpha "Appendix A" convention - the opposite of what |
|
153 % v1.6b and earlier did. |
|
154 % |
|
155 % captionsoff |
|
156 % disables the display of the figure/table captions. Some IEEE journals |
|
157 % request that captions be removed and figures/tables be put on pages |
|
158 % of their own at the end of an initial paper submission. The endfloat |
|
159 % package can be used with this class option to achieve this format. |
|
160 % |
|
161 % nofonttune |
|
162 % turns off tuning of the font interword spacing. Maybe useful to those |
|
163 % not using the standard Times fonts or for those who have already "tuned" |
|
164 % their fonts. |
|
165 % The default is to enable IEEEtran to tune font parameters. |
|
166 % |
|
167 % |
|
168 %---------- |
|
169 % Available CLASSINPUTs provided (all are macros unless otherwise noted): |
|
170 % \CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch |
|
171 % \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin |
|
172 % \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin |
|
173 % \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin |
|
174 % \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin |
|
175 % |
|
176 % Available CLASSINFOs provided: |
|
177 % \ifCLASSINFOpdf (TeX if conditional) |
|
178 % \CLASSINFOpaperwidth (macro) |
|
179 % \CLASSINFOpaperheight (macro) |
|
180 % \CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip (length) |
|
181 % \CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip (length) |
|
182 % |
|
183 % Available CLASSOPTIONs provided: |
|
184 % all class option flags (TeX if conditionals) unless otherwise noted, |
|
185 % e.g., \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff |
|
186 % point size options provided as a single macro: |
|
187 % \CLASSOPTIONpt |
|
188 % which will be defined as 9, 10, 11, or 12 depending on the document's |
|
189 % normalsize point size. |
|
190 % also, class option peerreviewca implies the use of class option peerreview |
|
191 % and classoption draft implies the use of class option draftcls |
|
192 |
|
193 |
|
194 |
|
195 |
|
196 |
|
197 \ProvidesClass{IEEEtran}[2007/03/05 V1.7a by Michael Shell] |
|
198 \typeout{-- See the "IEEEtran_HOWTO" manual for usage information.} |
|
199 \typeout{-- http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/} |
|
200 \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} |
|
201 |
|
202 % IEEEtran.cls version numbers, provided as of V1.3 |
|
203 % These values serve as a way a .tex file can |
|
204 % determine if the new features are provided. |
|
205 % The version number of this IEEEtrans.cls can be obtained from |
|
206 % these values. i.e., V1.4 |
|
207 % KEEP THESE AS INTEGERS! i.e., NO {4a} or anything like that- |
|
208 % (no need to enumerate "a" minor changes here) |
|
209 \def\IEEEtransversionmajor{1} |
|
210 \def\IEEEtransversionminor{7} |
|
211 |
|
212 % These do nothing, but provide them like in article.cls |
|
213 \newif\if@restonecol |
|
214 \newif\if@titlepage |
|
215 |
|
216 |
|
217 % class option conditionals |
|
218 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONonecolumn \CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse |
|
219 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn \CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue |
|
220 |
|
221 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONoneside \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue |
|
222 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside \CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse |
|
223 |
|
224 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONfinal \CLASSOPTIONfinaltrue |
|
225 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraft \CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse |
|
226 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse |
|
227 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse |
|
228 |
|
229 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse |
|
230 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse |
|
231 |
|
232 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONjournal \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue |
|
233 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONconference \CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse |
|
234 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote \CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse |
|
235 |
|
236 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune \CLASSOPTIONnofonttunefalse |
|
237 |
|
238 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff \CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofffalse |
|
239 |
|
240 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc \CLASSOPTIONcompsocfalse |
|
241 |
|
242 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsocconf \CLASSOPTIONcompsocconffalse |
|
243 |
|
244 \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices \CLASSOPTIONromanappendicesfalse |
|
245 |
|
246 |
|
247 % class info conditionals |
|
248 |
|
249 % indicates if pdf (via pdflatex) output |
|
250 \newif\ifCLASSINFOpdf \CLASSINFOpdffalse |
|
251 |
|
252 |
|
253 % V1.6b internal flag to show if using a4paper |
|
254 \newif\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse |
|
255 |
|
256 |
|
257 |
|
258 % IEEEtran class scratch pad registers |
|
259 % dimen |
|
260 \newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA |
|
261 \newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB |
|
262 % count |
|
263 \newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountA |
|
264 \newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountB |
|
265 % token list |
|
266 \newtoks\@IEEEtrantmptoksA |
|
267 |
|
268 % we use \CLASSOPTIONpt so that we can ID the point size (even for 9pt docs) |
|
269 % as well as LaTeX's \@ptsize to retain some compatability with some |
|
270 % external packages |
|
271 \def\@ptsize{0} |
|
272 % LaTeX does not support 9pt, so we set \@ptsize to 0 - same as that of 10pt |
|
273 \DeclareOption{9pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{9}\def\@ptsize{0}} |
|
274 \DeclareOption{10pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{10}\def\@ptsize{0}} |
|
275 \DeclareOption{11pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{11}\def\@ptsize{1}} |
|
276 \DeclareOption{12pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{12}\def\@ptsize{2}} |
|
277 |
|
278 |
|
279 |
|
280 \DeclareOption{letterpaper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{11in}% |
|
281 \setlength{\paperwidth}{8.5in}% |
|
282 \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse |
|
283 \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{letter}% |
|
284 \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{8.5in}% |
|
285 \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{11in}} |
|
286 |
|
287 |
|
288 \DeclareOption{a4paper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{297mm}% |
|
289 \setlength{\paperwidth}{210mm}% |
|
290 \@IEEEusingAfourpapertrue |
|
291 \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{a4}% |
|
292 \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{210mm}% |
|
293 \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{297mm}} |
|
294 |
|
295 \DeclareOption{oneside}{\@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse |
|
296 \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue\CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse} |
|
297 \DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue\@mparswitchtrue |
|
298 \CLASSOPTIONtwosidetrue\CLASSOPTIONonesidefalse} |
|
299 |
|
300 \DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONonecolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumnfalse} |
|
301 \DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse} |
|
302 |
|
303 % If the user selects draft, then this class AND any packages |
|
304 % will go into draft mode. |
|
305 \DeclareOption{draft}{\CLASSOPTIONdrafttrue\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue |
|
306 \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} |
|
307 % draftcls is for a draft mode which will not affect any packages |
|
308 % used by the document. |
|
309 \DeclareOption{draftcls}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue |
|
310 \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} |
|
311 % draftclsnofoot is like draftcls, but without the footer. |
|
312 \DeclareOption{draftclsnofoot}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue |
|
313 \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoottrue} |
|
314 \DeclareOption{final}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse |
|
315 \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} |
|
316 |
|
317 \DeclareOption{journal}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse |
|
318 \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} |
|
319 |
|
320 \DeclareOption{conference}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse |
|
321 \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencetrue\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} |
|
322 |
|
323 \DeclareOption{technote}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse |
|
324 \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotetrue} |
|
325 |
|
326 \DeclareOption{peerreview}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse |
|
327 \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} |
|
328 |
|
329 \DeclareOption{peerreviewca}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcatrue |
|
330 \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} |
|
331 |
|
332 \DeclareOption{nofonttune}{\CLASSOPTIONnofonttunetrue} |
|
333 |
|
334 \DeclareOption{captionsoff}{\CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofftrue} |
|
335 |
|
336 \DeclareOption{compsoc}{\CLASSOPTIONcompsoctrue} |
|
337 |
|
338 \DeclareOption{compsocconf}{\CLASSOPTIONcompsocconftrue} |
|
339 |
|
340 \DeclareOption{romanappendices}{\CLASSOPTIONromanappendicestrue} |
|
341 |
|
342 |
|
343 % default to US letter paper, 10pt, twocolumn, one sided, final, journal |
|
344 \ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,10pt,twocolumn,oneside,final,journal} |
|
345 % overrride these defaults per user requests |
|
346 \ProcessOptions |
|
347 |
|
348 |
|
349 |
|
350 % Computer Society conditional execution command |
|
351 \long\def\@IEEEcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\relax#1\relax\fi\relax} |
|
352 % inverse |
|
353 \long\def\@IEEEnotcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\relax#1\relax\fi\relax} |
|
354 % compsoc conference |
|
355 \long\def\@IEEEcompsocconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsocconf\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax} |
|
356 % compsoc not conference |
|
357 \long\def\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax} |
|
358 |
|
359 |
|
360 % IEEE uses Times Roman font, so we'll default to Times. |
|
361 % These three commands make up the entire times.sty package. |
|
362 \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{phv} |
|
363 \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm} |
|
364 \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{pcr} |
|
365 |
|
366 \@IEEEcompsoconly{\typeout{-- Using IEEE Computer Society mode.}} |
|
367 |
|
368 % V1.7 compsoc nonconference papers, use Palatino/Palladio as the main text font, |
|
369 % not Times Roman. |
|
370 \@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ppl}} |
|
371 |
|
372 % enable Times/Palatino main text font |
|
373 \normalfont\selectfont |
|
374 |
|
375 |
|
376 |
|
377 |
|
378 |
|
379 % V1.7 conference notice message hook |
|
380 \def\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference{\typeout{}% |
|
381 \typeout{** Conference Paper **}% |
|
382 \typeout{Before submitting the final camera ready copy, remember to:}% |
|
383 \typeout{}% |
|
384 \typeout{ 1. Manually equalize the lengths of two columns on the last page}% |
|
385 \typeout{ of your paper;}% |
|
386 \typeout{}% |
|
387 \typeout{ 2. Ensure that any PostScript and/or PDF output post-processing}% |
|
388 \typeout{ uses only Type 1 fonts and that every step in the generation}% |
|
389 \typeout{ process uses the appropriate paper size.}% |
|
390 \typeout{}} |
|
391 |
|
392 |
|
393 % we can send console reminder messages to the user here |
|
394 \AtEndDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference\fi} |
|
395 |
|
396 |
|
397 % warn about the use of single column other than for draft mode |
|
398 \ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn\else% |
|
399 \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls\else% |
|
400 \typeout{** ATTENTION: Single column mode is not typically used with IEEE publications.}% |
|
401 \fi% |
|
402 \fi |
|
403 |
|
404 |
|
405 % V1.7 improved paper size setting code. |
|
406 % Set pdfpage and dvips paper sizes. Conditional tests are similar to that |
|
407 % of ifpdf.sty. Retain within {} to ensure tested macros are never altered, |
|
408 % even if only effect is to set them to \relax. |
|
409 % if \pdfoutput is undefined or equal to relax, output a dvips special |
|
410 {\@ifundefined{pdfoutput}{\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}}{% |
|
411 % pdfoutput is defined and not equal to \relax |
|
412 % check for pdfpageheight existence just in case someone sets pdfoutput |
|
413 % under non-pdflatex. If exists, set them regardless of value of \pdfoutput. |
|
414 \@ifundefined{pdfpageheight}{\relax}{\global\pdfpagewidth\paperwidth |
|
415 \global\pdfpageheight\paperheight}% |
|
416 % if using \pdfoutput=0 under pdflatex, send dvips papersize special |
|
417 \ifcase\pdfoutput |
|
418 \AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}% |
|
419 \else |
|
420 % we are using pdf output, set CLASSINFOpdf flag |
|
421 \global\CLASSINFOpdftrue |
|
422 \fi}} |
|
423 |
|
424 % let the user know the selected papersize |
|
425 \typeout{-- Using \CLASSINFOpaperwidth\space x \CLASSINFOpaperheight\space |
|
426 (\CLASSOPTIONpaper)\space paper.} |
|
427 |
|
428 \ifCLASSINFOpdf |
|
429 \typeout{-- Using PDF output.} |
|
430 \else |
|
431 \typeout{-- Using DVI output.} |
|
432 \fi |
|
433 |
|
434 |
|
435 % The idea hinted here is for LaTeX to generate markleft{} and markright{} |
|
436 % automatically for you after you enter \author{}, \journal{}, |
|
437 % \journaldate{}, journalvol{}, \journalnum{}, etc. |
|
438 % However, there may be some backward compatibility issues here as |
|
439 % well as some special applications for IEEEtran.cls and special issues |
|
440 % that may require the flexible \markleft{}, \markright{} and/or \markboth{}. |
|
441 % We'll leave this as an open future suggestion. |
|
442 %\newcommand{\journal}[1]{\def\@journal{#1}} |
|
443 %\def\@journal{} |
|
444 |
|
445 |
|
446 |
|
447 % pointsize values |
|
448 % used with ifx to determine the document's normal size |
|
449 \def\@IEEEptsizenine{9} |
|
450 \def\@IEEEptsizeten{10} |
|
451 \def\@IEEEptsizeeleven{11} |
|
452 \def\@IEEEptsizetwelve{12} |
|
453 |
|
454 |
|
455 |
|
456 % FONT DEFINITIONS (No sizexx.clo file needed) |
|
457 % V1.6 revised font sizes, displayskip values and |
|
458 % revised normalsize baselineskip to reduce underfull vbox problems |
|
459 % on the 58pc = 696pt = 9.5in text height we want |
|
460 % normalsize #lines/column baselineskip (aka leading) |
|
461 % 9pt 63 11.0476pt (truncated down) |
|
462 % 10pt 58 12pt (exact) |
|
463 % 11pt 52 13.3846pt (truncated down) |
|
464 % 12pt 50 13.92pt (exact) |
|
465 % |
|
466 |
|
467 % we need to store the nominal baselineskip for the given font size |
|
468 % in case baselinestretch ever changes. |
|
469 % this is a dimen, so it will not hold stretch or shrink |
|
470 \newdimen\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip |
|
471 \@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\baselineskip |
|
472 |
|
473 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine |
|
474 \typeout{-- This is a 9 point document.} |
|
475 \def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9}{11.0476pt}}% |
|
476 \setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.0476pt}% |
|
477 \normalsize |
|
478 \abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt% |
|
479 \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% |
|
480 \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus3pt% |
|
481 \belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt |
|
482 \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8.5}{10pt}} |
|
483 \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}} |
|
484 \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}} |
|
485 \def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}} |
|
486 % sublargesize is the same as large - 10pt |
|
487 \def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{10}{12pt}} |
|
488 \def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{10}{12pt}} |
|
489 \def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{12}{14pt}} |
|
490 \def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{14}{17pt}} |
|
491 \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{17}{20pt}} |
|
492 \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{20}{24pt}} |
|
493 \fi |
|
494 |
|
495 |
|
496 % Check if we have selected 10 points |
|
497 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten |
|
498 \typeout{-- This is a 10 point document.} |
|
499 \def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10}{12.00pt}}% |
|
500 \setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{12pt}% |
|
501 \normalsize |
|
502 \abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt% |
|
503 \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% |
|
504 \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus4pt% |
|
505 \belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt |
|
506 \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{9}{10pt}} |
|
507 \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}} |
|
508 \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}} |
|
509 \def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}} |
|
510 % sublargesize is a tad smaller than large - 11pt |
|
511 \def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{11}{13.4pt}} |
|
512 \def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}} |
|
513 \def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}} |
|
514 \def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}} |
|
515 \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}} |
|
516 \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} |
|
517 \fi |
|
518 |
|
519 |
|
520 % Check if we have selected 11 points |
|
521 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven |
|
522 \typeout{-- This is an 11 point document.} |
|
523 \def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11}{13.3846pt}}% |
|
524 \setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.3846pt}% |
|
525 \normalsize |
|
526 \abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt% |
|
527 \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% |
|
528 \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus5pt% |
|
529 \belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt |
|
530 \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}} |
|
531 \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}} |
|
532 \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}} |
|
533 \def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}} |
|
534 % sublargesize is the same as large - 12pt |
|
535 \def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{12}{14pt}} |
|
536 \def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}} |
|
537 \def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}} |
|
538 \def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}} |
|
539 \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}} |
|
540 \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} |
|
541 \fi |
|
542 |
|
543 |
|
544 % Check if we have selected 12 points |
|
545 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve |
|
546 \typeout{-- This is a 12 point document.} |
|
547 \def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12}{13.92pt}}% |
|
548 \setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.92pt}% |
|
549 \normalsize |
|
550 \abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt% |
|
551 \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% |
|
552 \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus6pt% |
|
553 \belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt |
|
554 \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}} |
|
555 \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}} |
|
556 \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}} |
|
557 \def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}} |
|
558 % sublargesize is the same as large - 14pt |
|
559 \def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{14}{17pt}} |
|
560 \def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{14}{17pt}} |
|
561 \def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{17}{20pt}} |
|
562 \def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{20}{24pt}} |
|
563 \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{22}{26pt}} |
|
564 \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} |
|
565 \fi |
|
566 |
|
567 |
|
568 % V1.6 The Computer Modern Fonts will issue a substitution warning for |
|
569 % 24pt titles (24.88pt is used instead) increase the substitution |
|
570 % tolerance to turn off this warning |
|
571 \def\fontsubfuzz{.9pt} |
|
572 % However, the default (and correct) Times font will scale exactly as needed. |
|
573 |
|
574 |
|
575 % warn the user in case they forget to use the 9pt option with |
|
576 % technote |
|
577 \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% |
|
578 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\else% |
|
579 \typeout{** ATTENTION: Technotes are normally 9pt documents.}% |
|
580 \fi% |
|
581 \fi |
|
582 |
|
583 |
|
584 % V1.7 |
|
585 % Improved \textunderscore to provide a much better fake _ when used with |
|
586 % OT1 encoding. Under OT1, detect use of pcr or cmtt \ttfamily and use |
|
587 % available true _ glyph for those two typewriter fonts. |
|
588 \def\@IEEEstringptm{ptm} % Times Roman family |
|
589 \def\@IEEEstringppl{ppl} % Palatino Roman family |
|
590 \def\@IEEEstringphv{phv} % Helvetica Sans Serif family |
|
591 \def\@IEEEstringpcr{pcr} % Courier typewriter family |
|
592 \def\@IEEEstringcmtt{cmtt} % Computer Modern typewriter family |
|
593 \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textunderscore}{\leavevmode |
|
594 \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringpcr\string_\else |
|
595 \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringcmtt\string_\else |
|
596 \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringptm\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else |
|
597 \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringppl\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else |
|
598 \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringphv\kern -0.03em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.62em\@height 0.52pt\kern -0.33ex}\kern -0.03em\else |
|
599 \kern 0.09em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.6em\@height 0.44pt\kern -0.63pt\kern -0.42ex}\kern 0.09em\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\relax} |
|
600 |
|
601 |
|
602 |
|
603 |
|
604 % set the default \baselinestretch |
|
605 \def\baselinestretch{1} |
|
606 \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
|
607 \def\baselinestretch{1.5}% default baselinestretch for draft modes |
|
608 \fi |
|
609 |
|
610 |
|
611 % process CLASSINPUT baselinestretch |
|
612 \ifx\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch\@IEEEundefined |
|
613 \else |
|
614 \edef\baselinestretch{\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch} % user CLASSINPUT override |
|
615 \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding \string\baselinestretch\space to |
|
616 \baselinestretch\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} |
|
617 \fi |
|
618 |
|
619 \normalsize % make \baselinestretch take affect |
|
620 |
|
621 |
|
622 |
|
623 |
|
624 % store the normalsize baselineskip |
|
625 \newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip |
|
626 \CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip=\baselineskip\relax |
|
627 % and the normalsize unity (baselinestretch=1) baselineskip |
|
628 % we could save a register by giving the user access to |
|
629 % \@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip. However, let's protect |
|
630 % its read only internal status |
|
631 \newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip |
|
632 \CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\relax |
|
633 % store the nominal value of jot |
|
634 \newdimen\IEEEnormaljot |
|
635 \IEEEnormaljot=0.25\baselineskip\relax |
|
636 |
|
637 % set \jot |
|
638 \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax |
|
639 |
|
640 |
|
641 |
|
642 |
|
643 % V1.6, we are now going to fine tune the interword spacing |
|
644 % The default interword glue for Times under TeX appears to use a |
|
645 % nominal interword spacing of 25% (relative to the font size, i.e., 1em) |
|
646 % a maximum of 40% and a minimum of 19%. |
|
647 % For example, 10pt text uses an interword glue of: |
|
648 % |
|
649 % 2.5pt plus 1.49998pt minus 0.59998pt |
|
650 % |
|
651 % However, IEEE allows for a more generous range which reduces the need |
|
652 % for hyphenation, especially for two column text. Furthermore, IEEE |
|
653 % tends to use a little bit more nominal space between the words. |
|
654 % IEEE's interword spacing percentages appear to be: |
|
655 % 35% nominal |
|
656 % 23% minimum |
|
657 % 50% maximum |
|
658 % (They may even be using a tad more for the largest fonts such as 24pt.) |
|
659 % |
|
660 % for bold text, IEEE increases the spacing a little more: |
|
661 % 37.5% nominal |
|
662 % 23% minimum |
|
663 % 55% maximum |
|
664 |
|
665 % here are the interword spacing ratios we'll use |
|
666 % for medium (normal weight) |
|
667 \def\@IEEEinterspaceratioM{0.35} |
|
668 \def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM{0.23} |
|
669 \def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM{0.50} |
|
670 |
|
671 % for bold |
|
672 \def\@IEEEinterspaceratioB{0.375} |
|
673 \def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB{0.23} |
|
674 \def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB{0.55} |
|
675 |
|
676 |
|
677 % command to revise the interword spacing for the current font under TeX: |
|
678 % \fontdimen2 = nominal interword space |
|
679 % \fontdimen3 = interword stretch |
|
680 % \fontdimen4 = interword shrink |
|
681 % since all changes to the \fontdimen are global, we can enclose these commands |
|
682 % in braces to confine any font attribute or length changes |
|
683 \def\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens#1#2#3{{% |
|
684 \setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\f@size pt}% grab the font size in pt, could use 1em instead. |
|
685 \setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% |
|
686 \fontdimen2\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax |
|
687 \addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% |
|
688 \fontdimen3\font=-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax |
|
689 \setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% |
|
690 \addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% |
|
691 \fontdimen4\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax}} |
|
692 |
|
693 % revise the interword spacing for each font weight |
|
694 \def\@@IEEEsetfontdimens{{% |
|
695 \mdseries |
|
696 \@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM}% |
|
697 \bfseries |
|
698 \@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB}% |
|
699 }} |
|
700 |
|
701 % revise the interword spacing for each font shape |
|
702 % \slshape is not often used for IEEE work and is not altered here. The \scshape caps are |
|
703 % already a tad too large in the free LaTeX fonts (as compared to what IEEE uses) so we |
|
704 % won't alter these either. |
|
705 \def\@IEEEsetfontdimens{{% |
|
706 \normalfont |
|
707 \@@IEEEsetfontdimens |
|
708 \normalfont\itshape |
|
709 \@@IEEEsetfontdimens |
|
710 }} |
|
711 |
|
712 % command to revise the interword spacing for each font size (and shape |
|
713 % and weight). Only the \rmfamily is done here as \ttfamily uses a |
|
714 % fixed spacing and \sffamily is not used as the main text of IEEE papers. |
|
715 \def\@IEEEtunefonts{{\selectfont\rmfamily |
|
716 \tiny\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
|
717 \scriptsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
|
718 \footnotesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
|
719 \small\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
|
720 \normalsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
|
721 \sublargesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
|
722 \large\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
|
723 \LARGE\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
|
724 \huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
|
725 \Huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens}} |
|
726 |
|
727 % if the nofonttune class option is not given, revise the interword spacing |
|
728 % now - in case IEEEtran makes any default length measurements, and make |
|
729 % sure all the default fonts are loaded |
|
730 \ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else |
|
731 \@IEEEtunefonts |
|
732 \fi |
|
733 |
|
734 % and again at the start of the document in case the user loaded different fonts |
|
735 \AtBeginDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else\@IEEEtunefonts\fi} |
|
736 |
|
737 |
|
738 |
|
739 % V1.6 |
|
740 % LaTeX is a little to quick to use hyphenations |
|
741 % So, we increase the penalty for their use and raise |
|
742 % the badness level that triggers an underfull hbox |
|
743 % warning. The author may still have to tweak things, |
|
744 % but the appearance will be much better "right out |
|
745 % of the box" than that under V1.5 and prior. |
|
746 % TeX default is 50 |
|
747 \hyphenpenalty=750 |
|
748 % If we didn't adjust the interword spacing, 2200 might be better. |
|
749 % The TeX default is 1000 |
|
750 \hbadness=1350 |
|
751 % IEEE does not use extra spacing after punctuation |
|
752 \frenchspacing |
|
753 |
|
754 % V1.7 increase this a tad to discourage equation breaks |
|
755 \binoppenalty=1000 % default 700 |
|
756 \relpenalty=800 % default 500 |
|
757 |
|
758 |
|
759 % margin note stuff |
|
760 \marginparsep 10pt |
|
761 \marginparwidth 20pt |
|
762 \marginparpush 25pt |
|
763 |
|
764 |
|
765 % if things get too close, go ahead and let them touch |
|
766 \lineskip 0pt |
|
767 \normallineskip 0pt |
|
768 \lineskiplimit 0pt |
|
769 \normallineskiplimit 0pt |
|
770 |
|
771 % The distance from the lower edge of the text body to the |
|
772 % footline |
|
773 \footskip 0.4in |
|
774 |
|
775 % normally zero, should be relative to font height. |
|
776 % put in a little rubber to help stop some bad breaks (underfull vboxes) |
|
777 \parskip 0ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.1ex |
|
778 |
|
779 \parindent 1.0em |
|
780 |
|
781 \topmargin -49.0pt |
|
782 \headheight 12pt |
|
783 \headsep 0.25in |
|
784 |
|
785 % use the normal font baselineskip |
|
786 % so that \topskip is unaffected by changes in \baselinestretch |
|
787 \topskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip |
|
788 \textheight 58pc % 9.63in, 696pt |
|
789 % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. |
|
790 % The normal baselineskip for each document point size is used |
|
791 % to determine these values. |
|
792 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=63\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 63 lines/page |
|
793 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 58 lines/page |
|
794 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=52\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 52 lines/page |
|
795 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 50 lines/page |
|
796 |
|
797 |
|
798 \columnsep 1pc |
|
799 \textwidth 43pc % 2 x 21pc + 1pc = 43pc |
|
800 |
|
801 |
|
802 % the default side margins are equal |
|
803 \if@IEEEusingAfourpaper |
|
804 \oddsidemargin 19.05mm |
|
805 \evensidemargin 19.05mm |
|
806 \else |
|
807 \oddsidemargin 0.680in |
|
808 \evensidemargin 0.680in |
|
809 \fi |
|
810 % compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset |
|
811 \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in} |
|
812 \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in} |
|
813 |
|
814 |
|
815 |
|
816 % adjust margins for conference mode |
|
817 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
|
818 \topmargin -0.25in |
|
819 % we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers |
|
820 \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight} |
|
821 \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep} |
|
822 \textheight 9.25in % The standard for conferences (668.4975pt) |
|
823 % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. |
|
824 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=61\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 61 lines/page |
|
825 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=56\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 56 lines/page |
|
826 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 50 lines/page |
|
827 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 48 lines/page |
|
828 \fi |
|
829 |
|
830 |
|
831 % compsoc conference |
|
832 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsocconf |
|
833 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
|
834 % compsoc conference use a larger value for columnsep |
|
835 \columnsep 0.25in |
|
836 % compsoc conferences want 1in top margin, 1.125in bottom margin |
|
837 \topmargin 0in |
|
838 %\addtolength{\topmargin}{-6pt}% we tweak this a tad to better comply with top of line stuff |
|
839 % we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers |
|
840 \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight} |
|
841 \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep} |
|
842 \textheight 9.0in % (641.39625pt) |
|
843 |
|
844 % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. |
|
845 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 58 lines/page |
|
846 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=54\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 54 lines/page |
|
847 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 48 lines/page |
|
848 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=46\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 46 lines/page |
|
849 \textwidth 7in |
|
850 |
|
851 |
|
852 %adjust text h/w for A4 paper |
|
853 \if@IEEEusingAfourpaper |
|
854 \textheight 9.69in |
|
855 \textwidth 6.77in |
|
856 \fi |
|
857 |
|
858 % the default side margins are equal |
|
859 \if@IEEEusingAfourpaper |
|
860 \oddsidemargin 19.05mm |
|
861 \evensidemargin 19.05mm |
|
862 \else |
|
863 \oddsidemargin 0.75in |
|
864 \evensidemargin 0.75in |
|
865 \fi |
|
866 % compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset |
|
867 \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in} |
|
868 \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in} |
|
869 \fi\fi |
|
870 |
|
871 |
|
872 |
|
873 % draft mode settings override that of all other modes |
|
874 % provides a nice 1in margin all around the paper and extra |
|
875 % space between the lines for editor's comments |
|
876 \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
|
877 % want 1in from top of paper to text |
|
878 \setlength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}% |
|
879 \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}% |
|
880 % we want 1in side margins regardless of paper type |
|
881 \oddsidemargin 0in |
|
882 \evensidemargin 0in |
|
883 % set the text width |
|
884 \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth}% |
|
885 \addtolength{\textwidth}{-2.0in}% |
|
886 \setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight}% |
|
887 \addtolength{\textheight}{-2.0in}% |
|
888 % digitize textheight to be an integer number of lines. |
|
889 % this may cause the bottom margin to be off a tad |
|
890 \addtolength{\textheight}{-1\topskip}% |
|
891 \divide\textheight by \baselineskip% |
|
892 \multiply\textheight by \baselineskip% |
|
893 \addtolength{\textheight}{\topskip}% |
|
894 \fi |
|
895 |
|
896 |
|
897 |
|
898 % process CLASSINPUT inner/outer margin |
|
899 % if inner margin defined, but outer margin not, set outer to inner. |
|
900 \ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined |
|
901 \else |
|
902 \ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined |
|
903 \edef\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} |
|
904 \fi |
|
905 \fi |
|
906 |
|
907 \ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined |
|
908 \else |
|
909 % if outer margin defined, but inner margin not, set inner to outer. |
|
910 \ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined |
|
911 \edef\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin} |
|
912 \fi |
|
913 \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} |
|
914 \ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside |
|
915 \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin} |
|
916 \else |
|
917 \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} |
|
918 \fi |
|
919 \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in} |
|
920 \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in} |
|
921 \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth} |
|
922 \addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} |
|
923 \addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin} |
|
924 \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding inner side margin to \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\space and |
|
925 outer side margin to \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} |
|
926 \fi |
|
927 |
|
928 |
|
929 |
|
930 % process CLASSINPUT top/bottom text margin |
|
931 % if toptext margin defined, but bottomtext margin not, set bottomtext to toptext margin |
|
932 \ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined |
|
933 \else |
|
934 \ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined |
|
935 \edef\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin} |
|
936 \fi |
|
937 \fi |
|
938 |
|
939 \ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined |
|
940 \else |
|
941 % if bottomtext margin defined, but toptext margin not, set toptext to bottomtext margin |
|
942 \ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined |
|
943 \edef\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin} |
|
944 \fi |
|
945 \setlength{\topmargin}{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin} |
|
946 \addtolength{\topmargin}{-1in} |
|
947 \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight} |
|
948 \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep} |
|
949 \setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight} |
|
950 \addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin} |
|
951 \addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin} |
|
952 % in the default format we use the normal baselineskip as topskip |
|
953 % we only need 0.7 of this to clear typical top text and we need |
|
954 % an extra 0.3 spacing at the bottom for descenders. This will |
|
955 % correct for both. |
|
956 \addtolength{\topmargin}{-0.3\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip} |
|
957 \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding top text margin to \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\space and |
|
958 bottom text margin to \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} |
|
959 \fi |
|
960 |
|
961 |
|
962 |
|
963 |
|
964 |
|
965 |
|
966 |
|
967 % LIST SPACING CONTROLS |
|
968 |
|
969 % Controls the amount of EXTRA spacing |
|
970 % above and below \trivlist |
|
971 % Both \list and IED lists override this. |
|
972 % However, \trivlist will use this as will most |
|
973 % things built from \trivlist like the \center |
|
974 % environment. |
|
975 \topsep 0.5\baselineskip |
|
976 |
|
977 % Controls the additional spacing around lists preceded |
|
978 % or followed by blank lines. IEEE does not increase |
|
979 % spacing before or after paragraphs so it is set to zero. |
|
980 % \z@ is the same as zero, but faster. |
|
981 \partopsep \z@ |
|
982 |
|
983 % Controls the spacing between paragraphs in lists. |
|
984 % IEEE does not increase spacing before or after paragraphs |
|
985 % so this is also zero. |
|
986 % With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to |
|
987 % this value DO affect lists (but not IED lists). |
|
988 \parsep \z@ |
|
989 |
|
990 % Controls the extra spacing between list items. |
|
991 % IEEE does not put extra spacing between items. |
|
992 % With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to this value DO affect |
|
993 % lists (but not IED lists). |
|
994 \itemsep \z@ |
|
995 |
|
996 % \itemindent is the amount to indent the FIRST line of a list |
|
997 % item. It is auto set to zero within the \list environment. To alter |
|
998 % it, you have to do so when you call the \list. |
|
999 % However, IEEE uses this for the theorem environment |
|
1000 % There is an alternative value for this near \leftmargini below |
|
1001 \itemindent -1em |
|
1002 |
|
1003 % \leftmargin, the spacing from the left margin of the main text to |
|
1004 % the left of the main body of a list item is set by \list. |
|
1005 % Hence this statement does nothing for lists. |
|
1006 % But, quote and verse do use it for indention. |
|
1007 \leftmargin 2em |
|
1008 |
|
1009 % we retain this stuff from the older IEEEtran.cls so that \list |
|
1010 % will work the same way as before. However, itemize, enumerate and |
|
1011 % description (IED) could care less about what these are as they |
|
1012 % all are overridden. |
|
1013 \leftmargini 2em |
|
1014 %\itemindent 2em % Alternative values: sometimes used. |
|
1015 %\leftmargini 0em |
|
1016 \leftmarginii 1em |
|
1017 \leftmarginiii 1.5em |
|
1018 \leftmarginiv 1.5em |
|
1019 \leftmarginv 1.0em |
|
1020 \leftmarginvi 1.0em |
|
1021 \labelsep 0.5em |
|
1022 \labelwidth \z@ |
|
1023 |
|
1024 |
|
1025 % The old IEEEtran.cls behavior of \list is retained. |
|
1026 % However, the new V1.3 IED list environments override all the |
|
1027 % @list stuff (\@listX is called within \list for the |
|
1028 % appropriate level just before the user's list_decl is called). |
|
1029 % \topsep is now 2pt as IEEE puts a little extra space around |
|
1030 % lists - used by those non-IED macros that depend on \list. |
|
1031 % Note that \parsep and \itemsep are not redefined as in |
|
1032 % the sizexx.clo \@listX (which article.cls uses) so global changes |
|
1033 % of these values DO affect \list |
|
1034 % |
|
1035 \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini \topsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt} |
|
1036 \let\@listI\@listi |
|
1037 \def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii\labelwidth\leftmarginii% |
|
1038 \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} |
|
1039 \def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii\labelwidth\leftmarginiii% |
|
1040 \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} |
|
1041 \def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv\labelwidth\leftmarginiv% |
|
1042 \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} |
|
1043 \def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv\labelwidth\leftmarginv% |
|
1044 \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} |
|
1045 \def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi\labelwidth\leftmarginvi% |
|
1046 \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} |
|
1047 |
|
1048 |
|
1049 % IEEE uses 5) not 5. |
|
1050 \def\labelenumi{\theenumi)} \def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}} |
|
1051 |
|
1052 % IEEE uses a) not (a) |
|
1053 \def\labelenumii{\theenumii)} \def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}} |
|
1054 |
|
1055 % IEEE uses iii) not iii. |
|
1056 \def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii)} \def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}} |
|
1057 |
|
1058 % IEEE uses A) not A. |
|
1059 \def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv)} \def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}} |
|
1060 |
|
1061 % exactly the same as in article.cls |
|
1062 \def\p@enumii{\theenumi} |
|
1063 \def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)} |
|
1064 \def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii} |
|
1065 |
|
1066 % itemized list label styles |
|
1067 \def\labelitemi{$\scriptstyle\bullet$} |
|
1068 \def\labelitemii{\textbf{--}} |
|
1069 \def\labelitemiii{$\ast$} |
|
1070 \def\labelitemiv{$\cdot$} |
|
1071 |
|
1072 |
|
1073 |
|
1074 % **** V1.3 ENHANCEMENTS **** |
|
1075 % Itemize, Enumerate and Description (IED) List Controls |
|
1076 % *************************** |
|
1077 % |
|
1078 % |
|
1079 % IEEE seems to use at least two different values by |
|
1080 % which ITEMIZED list labels are indented to the right |
|
1081 % For The Journal of Lightwave Technology (JLT) and The Journal |
|
1082 % on Selected Areas in Communications (JSAC), they tend to use |
|
1083 % an indention equal to \parindent. For Transactions on Communications |
|
1084 % they tend to indent ITEMIZED lists a little more--- 1.3\parindent. |
|
1085 % We'll provide both values here for you so that you can choose |
|
1086 % which one you like in your document using a command such as: |
|
1087 % setlength{\IEEEilabelindent}{\IEEEilabelindentB} |
|
1088 \newdimen\IEEEilabelindentA |
|
1089 \IEEEilabelindentA \parindent |
|
1090 |
|
1091 \newdimen\IEEEilabelindentB |
|
1092 \IEEEilabelindentB 1.3\parindent |
|
1093 % However, we'll default to using \parindent |
|
1094 % which makes more sense to me |
|
1095 \newdimen\IEEEilabelindent |
|
1096 \IEEEilabelindent \IEEEilabelindentA |
|
1097 |
|
1098 |
|
1099 % This controls the default amount the enumerated list labels |
|
1100 % are indented to the right. |
|
1101 % Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention |
|
1102 \newdimen\IEEEelabelindent |
|
1103 \IEEEelabelindent \parindent |
|
1104 |
|
1105 % This controls the default amount the description list labels |
|
1106 % are indented to the right. |
|
1107 % Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention |
|
1108 \newdimen\IEEEdlabelindent |
|
1109 \IEEEdlabelindent \parindent |
|
1110 |
|
1111 % This is the value actually used within the IED lists. |
|
1112 % The IED environments automatically set its value to |
|
1113 % one of the three values above, so global changes do |
|
1114 % not have any effect |
|
1115 \newdimen\IEEElabelindent |
|
1116 \IEEElabelindent \parindent |
|
1117 |
|
1118 % The actual amount labels will be indented is |
|
1119 % \IEEElabelindent multiplied by the factor below |
|
1120 % corresponding to the level of nesting depth |
|
1121 % This provides a means by which the user can |
|
1122 % alter the effective \IEEElabelindent for deeper |
|
1123 % levels |
|
1124 % There may not be such a thing as correct "standard IEEE" |
|
1125 % values. What IEEE actually does may depend on the specific |
|
1126 % circumstances. |
|
1127 % The first list level almost always has full indention. |
|
1128 % The second levels I've seen have only 75% of the normal indentation |
|
1129 % Three level or greater nestings are very rare. I am guessing |
|
1130 % that they don't use any indentation. |
|
1131 \def\IEEElabelindentfactori{1.0} % almost always one |
|
1132 \def\IEEElabelindentfactorii{0.75} % 0.0 or 1.0 may be used in some cases |
|
1133 \def\IEEElabelindentfactoriii{0.0} % 0.75? 0.5? 0.0? |
|
1134 \def\IEEElabelindentfactoriv{0.0} |
|
1135 \def\IEEElabelindentfactorv{0.0} |
|
1136 \def\IEEElabelindentfactorvi{0.0} |
|
1137 |
|
1138 % value actually used within IED lists, it is auto |
|
1139 % set to one of the 6 values above |
|
1140 % global changes here have no effect |
|
1141 \def\IEEElabelindentfactor{1.0} |
|
1142 |
|
1143 % This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED |
|
1144 % list labels and the list text, when normal text is used for |
|
1145 % the labels. |
|
1146 \newdimen\IEEEiednormlabelsep |
|
1147 \IEEEiednormlabelsep 0.6em |
|
1148 |
|
1149 % This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED |
|
1150 % list labels and the list text, when math symbols are used for |
|
1151 % the labels (nomenclature lists). IEEE usually increases the |
|
1152 % spacing in these cases |
|
1153 \newdimen\IEEEiedmathlabelsep |
|
1154 \IEEEiedmathlabelsep 1.2em |
|
1155 |
|
1156 % This controls the extra vertical separation put above and |
|
1157 % below each IED list. IEEE usually puts a little extra spacing |
|
1158 % around each list. However, this spacing is barely noticeable. |
|
1159 \newskip\IEEEiedtopsep |
|
1160 \IEEEiedtopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt |
|
1161 |
|
1162 |
|
1163 % This command is executed within each IED list environment |
|
1164 % at the beginning of the list. You can use this to set the |
|
1165 % parameters for some/all your IED list(s) without disturbing |
|
1166 % global parameters that affect things other than lists. |
|
1167 % i.e., renewcommand{\IEEEiedlistdecl}{\setlength{\labelsep}{5em}} |
|
1168 % will alter the \labelsep for the next list(s) until |
|
1169 % \IEEEiedlistdecl is redefined. |
|
1170 \def\IEEEiedlistdecl{\relax} |
|
1171 |
|
1172 % This command provides an easy way to set \leftmargin based |
|
1173 % on the \labelwidth, \labelsep and the argument \IEEElabelindent |
|
1174 % Usage: \IEEEcalcleftmargin{width-to-indent-the-label} |
|
1175 % output is in the \leftmargin variable, i.e., effectively: |
|
1176 % \leftmargin = argument + \labelwidth + \labelsep |
|
1177 % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % |
|
1178 \def\IEEEcalcleftmargin#1{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}% |
|
1179 \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}% |
|
1180 \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}} |
|
1181 |
|
1182 % This command provides an easy way to set \labelwidth to the |
|
1183 % width of the given text. It is the same as |
|
1184 % \settowidth{\labelwidth}{label-text} |
|
1185 % and useful as a shorter alternative. |
|
1186 % Typically used to set \labelwidth to be the width |
|
1187 % of the longest label in the list |
|
1188 \def\IEEEsetlabelwidth#1{\settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}} |
|
1189 |
|
1190 % When this command is executed, IED lists will use the |
|
1191 % IEEEiedmathlabelsep label separation rather than the normal |
|
1192 % spacing. To have an effect, this command must be executed via |
|
1193 % the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list |
|
1194 % environments. |
|
1195 \def\IEEEusemathlabelsep{\setlength{\labelsep}{\IEEEiedmathlabelsep}} |
|
1196 |
|
1197 % A flag which controls whether the IED lists automatically |
|
1198 % calculate \leftmargin from \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and \labelsep |
|
1199 % Useful if you want to specify your own \leftmargin |
|
1200 % This flag must be set (\IEEEnocalcleftmargintrue or \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse) |
|
1201 % via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list |
|
1202 % environments to have an effect. |
|
1203 \newif\ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin |
|
1204 \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse |
|
1205 |
|
1206 % A flag which controls whether \IEEElabelindent is multiplied by |
|
1207 % the \IEEElabelindentfactor for each list level. |
|
1208 % This flag must be set via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option |
|
1209 % of the IED list environments to have an effect. |
|
1210 \newif\ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor |
|
1211 \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse |
|
1212 |
|
1213 |
|
1214 % internal variable to indicate type of IED label |
|
1215 % justification |
|
1216 % 0 - left; 1 - center; 2 - right |
|
1217 \def\@IEEEiedjustify{0} |
|
1218 |
|
1219 |
|
1220 % commands to allow the user to control IED |
|
1221 % label justifications. Use these commands within |
|
1222 % the IED environment option or in the \IEEEiedlistdecl |
|
1223 % Note that changing the normal list justifications |
|
1224 % is nonstandard and IEEE may not like it if you do so! |
|
1225 % I include these commands as they may be helpful to |
|
1226 % those who are using these enhanced list controls for |
|
1227 % other non-IEEE related LaTeX work. |
|
1228 % itemize and enumerate automatically default to right |
|
1229 % justification, description defaults to left. |
|
1230 \def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}}%left |
|
1231 \def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{1}}%center |
|
1232 \def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}}%right |
|
1233 |
|
1234 |
|
1235 |
|
1236 |
|
1237 % commands to save to and restore from the list parameter copies |
|
1238 % this allows us to set all the list parameters within |
|
1239 % the list_decl and prevent \list (and its \@list) |
|
1240 % from overriding any of our parameters |
|
1241 % V1.6 use \edefs instead of dimen's to conserve dimen registers |
|
1242 % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % |
|
1243 \def\@IEEEsavelistparams{\edef\@IEEEiedtopsep{\the\topsep}% |
|
1244 \edef\@IEEEiedlabelwidth{\the\labelwidth}% |
|
1245 \edef\@IEEEiedlabelsep{\the\labelsep}% |
|
1246 \edef\@IEEEiedleftmargin{\the\leftmargin}% |
|
1247 \edef\@IEEEiedpartopsep{\the\partopsep}% |
|
1248 \edef\@IEEEiedparsep{\the\parsep}% |
|
1249 \edef\@IEEEieditemsep{\the\itemsep}% |
|
1250 \edef\@IEEEiedrightmargin{\the\rightmargin}% |
|
1251 \edef\@IEEEiedlistparindent{\the\listparindent}% |
|
1252 \edef\@IEEEieditemindent{\the\itemindent}} |
|
1253 |
|
1254 % Note controlled spacing here |
|
1255 \def\@IEEErestorelistparams{\topsep\@IEEEiedtopsep\relax% |
|
1256 \labelwidth\@IEEEiedlabelwidth\relax% |
|
1257 \labelsep\@IEEEiedlabelsep\relax% |
|
1258 \leftmargin\@IEEEiedleftmargin\relax% |
|
1259 \partopsep\@IEEEiedpartopsep\relax% |
|
1260 \parsep\@IEEEiedparsep\relax% |
|
1261 \itemsep\@IEEEieditemsep\relax% |
|
1262 \rightmargin\@IEEEiedrightmargin\relax% |
|
1263 \listparindent\@IEEEiedlistparindent\relax% |
|
1264 \itemindent\@IEEEieditemindent\relax} |
|
1265 |
|
1266 |
|
1267 % v1.6b provide original LaTeX IED list environments |
|
1268 % note that latex.ltx defines \itemize and \enumerate, but not \description |
|
1269 % which must be created by the base classes |
|
1270 % save original LaTeX itemize and enumerate |
|
1271 \let\LaTeXitemize\itemize |
|
1272 \let\endLaTeXitemize\enditemize |
|
1273 \let\LaTeXenumerate\enumerate |
|
1274 \let\endLaTeXenumerate\endenumerate |
|
1275 |
|
1276 % provide original LaTeX description environment from article.cls |
|
1277 \newenvironment{LaTeXdescription} |
|
1278 {\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin |
|
1279 \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}} |
|
1280 {\endlist} |
|
1281 \newcommand*\descriptionlabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep |
|
1282 \normalfont\bfseries #1} |
|
1283 |
|
1284 |
|
1285 % override LaTeX's default IED lists |
|
1286 \def\itemize{\@IEEEitemize} |
|
1287 \def\enditemize{\@endIEEEitemize} |
|
1288 \def\enumerate{\@IEEEenumerate} |
|
1289 \def\endenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate} |
|
1290 \def\description{\@IEEEdescription} |
|
1291 \def\enddescription{\@endIEEEdescription} |
|
1292 |
|
1293 % provide the user with aliases - may help those using packages that |
|
1294 % override itemize, enumerate, or description |
|
1295 \def\IEEEitemize{\@IEEEitemize} |
|
1296 \def\endIEEEitemize{\@endIEEEitemize} |
|
1297 \def\IEEEenumerate{\@IEEEenumerate} |
|
1298 \def\endIEEEenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate} |
|
1299 \def\IEEEdescription{\@IEEEdescription} |
|
1300 \def\endIEEEdescription{\@endIEEEdescription} |
|
1301 |
|
1302 |
|
1303 % V1.6 we want to keep the IEEEtran IED list definitions as our own internal |
|
1304 % commands so they are protected against redefinition |
|
1305 \def\@IEEEitemize{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEitemize}{\@@IEEEitemize[\relax]}} |
|
1306 \def\@IEEEenumerate{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEenumerate}{\@@IEEEenumerate[\relax]}} |
|
1307 \def\@IEEEdescription{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEdescription}{\@@IEEEdescription[\relax]}} |
|
1308 \def\@endIEEEitemize{\endlist} |
|
1309 \def\@endIEEEenumerate{\endlist} |
|
1310 \def\@endIEEEdescription{\endlist} |
|
1311 |
|
1312 |
|
1313 % DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS |
|
1314 % AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS |
|
1315 % IEEEtran itemized list MDS 1/2001 |
|
1316 % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % |
|
1317 \def\@@IEEEitemize[#1]{% |
|
1318 \ifnum\@itemdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else% |
|
1319 \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% |
|
1320 \advance\@itemdepth\@ne% |
|
1321 \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}% |
|
1322 % get the labelindentfactor for this level |
|
1323 \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be |
|
1324 \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% |
|
1325 \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment |
|
1326 \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default |
|
1327 % set other defaults |
|
1328 \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse% |
|
1329 \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse% |
|
1330 \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% |
|
1331 \IEEElabelindent\IEEEilabelindent% |
|
1332 \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% |
|
1333 \partopsep 0ex% |
|
1334 \parsep 0ex% |
|
1335 \itemsep 0ex% |
|
1336 \rightmargin 0em% |
|
1337 \listparindent 0em% |
|
1338 \itemindent 0em% |
|
1339 % calculate the label width |
|
1340 % the user can override this later if |
|
1341 % they specified a \labelwidth |
|
1342 \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\csname labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth\endcsname}% |
|
1343 \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters |
|
1344 \list{\csname\@itemitem\endcsname}{% |
|
1345 \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes |
|
1346 % to our globals |
|
1347 \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel |
|
1348 \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters |
|
1349 #1\relax% |
|
1350 % If the user has requested not to use the |
|
1351 % labelindent factor, don't revise \labelindent |
|
1352 \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax% |
|
1353 \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\labelindent% |
|
1354 \fi% |
|
1355 % Unless the user has requested otherwise, |
|
1356 % calculate our left margin based |
|
1357 % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and |
|
1358 % \labelsep |
|
1359 \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax% |
|
1360 \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}% |
|
1361 \fi}\fi\fi}% |
|
1362 |
|
1363 |
|
1364 % DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS |
|
1365 % AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS |
|
1366 % IEEEtran enumerate list MDS 1/2001 |
|
1367 % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % |
|
1368 \def\@@IEEEenumerate[#1]{% |
|
1369 \ifnum\@enumdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else% |
|
1370 \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% |
|
1371 \advance\@enumdepth\@ne% |
|
1372 \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}% |
|
1373 % get the labelindentfactor for this level |
|
1374 \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be |
|
1375 \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% |
|
1376 \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment |
|
1377 \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default |
|
1378 % set other defaults |
|
1379 \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse% |
|
1380 \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse% |
|
1381 \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% |
|
1382 \IEEElabelindent\IEEEelabelindent% |
|
1383 \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% |
|
1384 \partopsep 0ex% |
|
1385 \parsep 0ex% |
|
1386 \itemsep 0ex% |
|
1387 \rightmargin 0em% |
|
1388 \listparindent 0em% |
|
1389 \itemindent 0em% |
|
1390 % calculate the label width |
|
1391 % We'll set it to the width suitable for all labels using |
|
1392 % normalfont 1) to 9) |
|
1393 % The user can override this later |
|
1394 \settowidth{\labelwidth}{9)}% |
|
1395 \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters |
|
1396 \list{\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}{\usecounter{\@enumctr}% |
|
1397 \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes |
|
1398 % to our globals |
|
1399 \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel |
|
1400 \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters |
|
1401 #1\relax% |
|
1402 % If the user has requested not to use the |
|
1403 % IEEElabelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent |
|
1404 \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax% |
|
1405 \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent% |
|
1406 \fi% |
|
1407 % Unless the user has requested otherwise, |
|
1408 % calculate our left margin based |
|
1409 % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and |
|
1410 % \labelsep |
|
1411 \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax% |
|
1412 \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}% |
|
1413 \fi}\fi\fi}% |
|
1414 |
|
1415 |
|
1416 % DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS |
|
1417 % AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS |
|
1418 % IEEEtran description list MDS 1/2001 |
|
1419 % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % |
|
1420 \def\@@IEEEdescription[#1]{% |
|
1421 \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% |
|
1422 % get the labelindentfactor for this level |
|
1423 \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be |
|
1424 \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% |
|
1425 \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment |
|
1426 \def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}% left justified labels are default |
|
1427 % set other defaults |
|
1428 \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse% |
|
1429 \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse% |
|
1430 \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% |
|
1431 \IEEElabelindent\IEEEdlabelindent% |
|
1432 % assume normal labelsep |
|
1433 \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% |
|
1434 \partopsep 0ex% |
|
1435 \parsep 0ex% |
|
1436 \itemsep 0ex% |
|
1437 \rightmargin 0em% |
|
1438 \listparindent 0em% |
|
1439 \itemindent 0em% |
|
1440 % Bogus label width in case the user forgets |
|
1441 % to set it. |
|
1442 % TIP: If you want to see what a variable's width is you |
|
1443 % can use the TeX command \showthe\width-variable to |
|
1444 % display it on the screen during compilation |
|
1445 % (This might be helpful to know when you need to find out |
|
1446 % which label is the widest) |
|
1447 \settowidth{\labelwidth}{Hello}% |
|
1448 \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters |
|
1449 \list{}{\@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes |
|
1450 % to our globals |
|
1451 \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel |
|
1452 \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters |
|
1453 #1\relax% |
|
1454 % If the user has requested not to use the |
|
1455 % labelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent |
|
1456 \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax% |
|
1457 \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent% |
|
1458 \fi% |
|
1459 % Unless the user has requested otherwise, |
|
1460 % calculate our left margin based |
|
1461 % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and |
|
1462 % \labelsep |
|
1463 \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax% |
|
1464 \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}\relax% |
|
1465 \fi}\fi} |
|
1466 |
|
1467 % v1.6b we use one makelabel that does justification as needed. |
|
1468 \def\@IEEEiedmakelabel#1{\relax\if\@IEEEiedjustify 0\relax |
|
1469 \makebox[\labelwidth][l]{\normalfont #1}\else |
|
1470 \if\@IEEEiedjustify 1\relax |
|
1471 \makebox[\labelwidth][c]{\normalfont #1}\else |
|
1472 \makebox[\labelwidth][r]{\normalfont #1}\fi\fi} |
|
1473 |
|
1474 |
|
1475 % VERSE and QUOTE |
|
1476 % V1.7 define environments with newenvironment |
|
1477 \newenvironment{verse}{\let\\=\@centercr |
|
1478 \list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em \listparindent \itemindent |
|
1479 \rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item\relax} |
|
1480 {\endlist} |
|
1481 \newenvironment{quotation}{\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em \itemindent\listparindent |
|
1482 \rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep 0pt plus 1pt}\item\relax} |
|
1483 {\endlist} |
|
1484 \newenvironment{quote}{\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}\item\relax} |
|
1485 {\endlist} |
|
1486 |
|
1487 |
|
1488 % \titlepage |
|
1489 % provided only for backward compatibility. \maketitle is the correct |
|
1490 % way to create the title page. |
|
1491 \newif\if@restonecol |
|
1492 \def\titlepage{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn |
|
1493 \else \newpage \fi \thispagestyle{empty}\c@page\z@} |
|
1494 \def\endtitlepage{\if@restonecol\twocolumn \else \newpage \fi} |
|
1495 |
|
1496 % standard values from article.cls |
|
1497 \arraycolsep 5pt |
|
1498 \arrayrulewidth .4pt |
|
1499 \doublerulesep 2pt |
|
1500 |
|
1501 \tabcolsep 6pt |
|
1502 \tabbingsep 0.5em |
|
1503 |
|
1504 |
|
1505 %% FOOTNOTES |
|
1506 % |
|
1507 %\skip\footins 10pt plus 4pt minus 2pt |
|
1508 % V1.6 respond to changes in font size |
|
1509 % space added above the footnotes (if present) |
|
1510 \skip\footins 0.9\baselineskip plus 0.4\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip |
|
1511 |
|
1512 % V1.6, we need to make \footnotesep responsive to changes |
|
1513 % in \baselineskip or strange spacings will result when in |
|
1514 % draft mode. Here is a little LaTeX secret - \footnotesep |
|
1515 % determines the height of an invisible strut that is placed |
|
1516 % *above* the baseline of footnotes after the first. Since |
|
1517 % LaTeX considers the space for characters to be 0.7/baselineskip |
|
1518 % above the baseline and 0.3/baselineskip below it, we need to |
|
1519 % use 0.7/baselineskip as a \footnotesep to maintain equal spacing |
|
1520 % between all the lines of the footnotes. IEEE often uses a tad |
|
1521 % more, so use 0.8\baselineskip. This slightly larger value also helps |
|
1522 % the text to clear the footnote marks. Note that \thanks in IEEEtran |
|
1523 % uses its own value of \footnotesep which is set in \maketitle. |
|
1524 {\footnotesize |
|
1525 \global\footnotesep 0.8\baselineskip} |
|
1526 |
|
1527 |
|
1528 \skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins |
|
1529 \fboxsep = 3pt |
|
1530 \fboxrule = .4pt |
|
1531 % V1.6 use 1em, then use LaTeX2e's \@makefnmark |
|
1532 % Note that IEEE normally *left* aligns the footnote marks, so we don't need |
|
1533 % box resizing tricks here. |
|
1534 \long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@makefnmark}#1}% V1.6 use 1em |
|
1535 % V1.7 compsoc does not use superscipts for footnote marks |
|
1536 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
|
1537 \def\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark{\hbox{\normalfont\@thefnmark.\ }} |
|
1538 \long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark}#1} |
|
1539 \fi |
|
1540 |
|
1541 % IEEE does not use footnote rules |
|
1542 \def\footnoterule{} |
|
1543 |
|
1544 % V1.7 for compsoc, IEEE uses a footnote rule only for \thanks. We devise a "one-shot" |
|
1545 % system to implement this. |
|
1546 \newif\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule |
|
1547 \@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse |
|
1548 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
|
1549 \def\footnoterule{\relax\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule |
|
1550 \kern-5pt |
|
1551 \hbox to \columnwidth{\hfill\vrule width 0.5\columnwidth height 0.4pt\hfill} |
|
1552 \kern4.6pt |
|
1553 \global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse |
|
1554 \else |
|
1555 \relax |
|
1556 \fi} |
|
1557 \fi |
|
1558 |
|
1559 % V1.6 do not allow LaTeX to break a footnote across multiple pages |
|
1560 \interfootnotelinepenalty=10000 |
|
1561 |
|
1562 % V1.6 discourage breaks within equations |
|
1563 % Note that amsmath normally sets this to 10000, |
|
1564 % but LaTeX2e normally uses 100. |
|
1565 \interdisplaylinepenalty=2500 |
|
1566 |
|
1567 % default allows section depth up to /paragraph |
|
1568 \setcounter{secnumdepth}{4} |
|
1569 |
|
1570 % technotes do not allow /paragraph |
|
1571 \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote |
|
1572 \setcounter{secnumdepth}{3} |
|
1573 \fi |
|
1574 % neither do compsoc conferences |
|
1575 \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}} |
|
1576 |
|
1577 |
|
1578 \newcounter{section} |
|
1579 \newcounter{subsection}[section] |
|
1580 \newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection] |
|
1581 \newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection] |
|
1582 |
|
1583 % used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray as other packages may |
|
1584 % have their own, different, implementations |
|
1585 \newcounter{IEEEsubequation}[equation] |
|
1586 |
|
1587 % as shown when called by user from \ref, \label and in table of contents |
|
1588 \def\theequation{\arabic{equation}} % 1 |
|
1589 \def\theIEEEsubequation{\theequation\alph{IEEEsubequation}} % 1a (used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray) |
|
1590 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
|
1591 % compsoc is all arabic |
|
1592 \def\thesection{\arabic{section}} |
|
1593 \def\thesubsection{\thesection.\arabic{subsection}} |
|
1594 \def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}} |
|
1595 \def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}} |
|
1596 \else |
|
1597 \def\thesection{\Roman{section}} % I |
|
1598 % V1.7, \mbox prevents breaks around - |
|
1599 \def\thesubsection{\mbox{\thesection-\Alph{subsection}}} % I-A |
|
1600 % V1.7 use I-A1 format used by IEEE rather than I-A.1 |
|
1601 \def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection\arabic{subsubsection}} % I-A1 |
|
1602 \def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection\alph{paragraph}} % I-A1a |
|
1603 \fi |
|
1604 |
|
1605 % From Heiko Oberdiek. Because of the \mbox in \thesubsection, we need to |
|
1606 % tell hyperref to disable the \mbox command when making PDF bookmarks. |
|
1607 % This done already with hyperref.sty version 6.74o and later, but |
|
1608 % it will not hurt to do it here again for users of older versions. |
|
1609 \@ifundefined{pdfstringdefPreHook}{\let\pdfstringdefPreHook\@empty}{}% |
|
1610 \g@addto@macro\pdfstringdefPreHook{\let\mbox\relax} |
|
1611 |
|
1612 |
|
1613 % Main text forms (how shown in main text headings) |
|
1614 % V1.6, using \thesection in \thesectiondis allows changes |
|
1615 % in the former to automatically appear in the latter |
|
1616 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
|
1617 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference |
|
1618 \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.} |
|
1619 \def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis\arabic{subsection}.} |
|
1620 \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis\arabic{subsubsection}.} |
|
1621 \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis\arabic{paragraph}.} |
|
1622 \else% compsoc not conferencs |
|
1623 \def\thesectiondis{\thesection} |
|
1624 \def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis.\arabic{subsection}} |
|
1625 \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis.\arabic{subsubsection}} |
|
1626 \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis.\arabic{paragraph}} |
|
1627 \fi |
|
1628 \else% not compsoc |
|
1629 \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.} % I. |
|
1630 \def\thesubsectiondis{\Alph{subsection}.} % B. |
|
1631 \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\arabic{subsubsection})} % 3) |
|
1632 \def\theparagraphdis{\alph{paragraph})} % d) |
|
1633 \fi |
|
1634 |
|
1635 % just like LaTeX2e's \@eqnnum |
|
1636 \def\theequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theequation)}}% (1) |
|
1637 % IEEEsubequation used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray |
|
1638 \def\theIEEEsubequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theIEEEsubequation)}}% (1a) |
|
1639 % redirect LaTeX2e's equation number display and all that depend on |
|
1640 % it, through IEEEtran's \theequationdis |
|
1641 \def\@eqnnum{\theequationdis} |
|
1642 |
|
1643 |
|
1644 |
|
1645 % V1.7 provide string macros as article.cls does |
|
1646 \def\contentsname{Contents} |
|
1647 \def\listfigurename{List of Figures} |
|
1648 \def\listtablename{List of Tables} |
|
1649 \def\refname{References} |
|
1650 \def\indexname{Index} |
|
1651 \def\figurename{Fig.} |
|
1652 \def\tablename{TABLE} |
|
1653 \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\figurename{Figure}\def\tablename{Table}} |
|
1654 \def\partname{Part} |
|
1655 \def\appendixname{Appendix} |
|
1656 \def\abstractname{Abstract} |
|
1657 % IEEE specific names |
|
1658 \def\IEEEkeywordsname{Keywords} |
|
1659 \def\IEEEproofname{Proof} |
|
1660 |
|
1661 |
|
1662 % LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES AND TABLE OF CONTENTS |
|
1663 % |
|
1664 \def\@pnumwidth{1.55em} |
|
1665 \def\@tocrmarg{2.55em} |
|
1666 \def\@dotsep{4.5} |
|
1667 \setcounter{tocdepth}{3} |
|
1668 |
|
1669 % adjusted some spacings here so that section numbers will not easily |
|
1670 % collide with the section titles. |
|
1671 % VIII; VIII-A; and VIII-A.1 are usually the worst offenders. |
|
1672 % MDS 1/2001 |
|
1673 \def\tableofcontents{\section*{\contentsname}\@starttoc{toc}} |
|
1674 \def\l@section#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}\addvspace{1.0em plus 1pt}% |
|
1675 \@tempdima 2.75em \begingroup \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth% |
|
1676 \parfillskip-\@pnumwidth {\bfseries\leavevmode #1}\hfil\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par% |
|
1677 \endgroup} |
|
1678 % argument format #1:level, #2:labelindent,#3:labelsep |
|
1679 \def\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{2.75em}{3.75em}} |
|
1680 \def\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{6.5em}{4.5em}} |
|
1681 % must provide \l@ defs for ALL sublevels EVEN if tocdepth |
|
1682 % is such as they will not appear in the table of contents |
|
1683 % these defs are how TOC knows what level these things are! |
|
1684 \def\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{6.5em}{5.5em}} |
|
1685 \def\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{6.5em}{6.5em}} |
|
1686 \def\listoffigures{\section*{\listfigurename}\@starttoc{lof}} |
|
1687 \def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{0em}{2.75em}} |
|
1688 \def\listoftables{\section*{\listtablename}\@starttoc{lot}} |
|
1689 \let\l@table\l@figure |
|
1690 |
|
1691 |
|
1692 %% Definitions for floats |
|
1693 %% |
|
1694 %% Normal Floats |
|
1695 \floatsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip |
|
1696 \textfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip |
|
1697 \@fptop 0pt plus 1fil |
|
1698 \@fpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil |
|
1699 \@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil |
|
1700 \def\topfraction{0.9} |
|
1701 \def\bottomfraction{0.4} |
|
1702 \def\floatpagefraction{0.8} |
|
1703 % V1.7, let top floats approach 90% of page |
|
1704 \def\textfraction{0.1} |
|
1705 |
|
1706 %% Double Column Floats |
|
1707 \dblfloatsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip |
|
1708 |
|
1709 \dbltextfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip |
|
1710 % Note that it would be nice if the rubber here actually worked in LaTeX2e. |
|
1711 % There is a long standing limitation in LaTeX, first discovered (to the best |
|
1712 % of my knowledge) by Alan Jeffrey in 1992. LaTeX ignores the stretchable |
|
1713 % portion of \dbltextfloatsep, and as a result, double column figures can and |
|
1714 % do result in an non-integer number of lines in the main text columns with |
|
1715 % underfull vbox errors as a consequence. A post to comp.text.tex |
|
1716 % by Donald Arseneau confirms that this had not yet been fixed in 1998. |
|
1717 % IEEEtran V1.6 will fix this problem for you in the titles, but it doesn't |
|
1718 % protect you from other double floats. Happy vspace'ing. |
|
1719 |
|
1720 \@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil |
|
1721 \@dblfpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil |
|
1722 \@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil |
|
1723 \def\dbltopfraction{0.8} |
|
1724 \def\dblfloatpagefraction{0.8} |
|
1725 \setcounter{dbltopnumber}{4} |
|
1726 |
|
1727 \intextsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip |
|
1728 \setcounter{topnumber}{2} |
|
1729 \setcounter{bottomnumber}{2} |
|
1730 \setcounter{totalnumber}{4} |
|
1731 |
|
1732 |
|
1733 |
|
1734 % article class provides these, we should too. |
|
1735 \newlength\abovecaptionskip |
|
1736 \newlength\belowcaptionskip |
|
1737 % but only \abovecaptionskip is used above figure captions and *below* table |
|
1738 % captions |
|
1739 \setlength\abovecaptionskip{0.5\baselineskip} |
|
1740 \setlength\belowcaptionskip{0pt} |
|
1741 % V1.6 create hooks in case the caption spacing ever needs to be |
|
1742 % overridden by a user |
|
1743 \def\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}% |
|
1744 \def\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}% |
|
1745 |
|
1746 |
|
1747 % 1.6b revise caption system so that \@makecaption uses two arguments |
|
1748 % as with LaTeX2e. Otherwise, there will be problems when using hyperref. |
|
1749 \def\@IEEEtablestring{table} |
|
1750 |
|
1751 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
|
1752 % V1.7 compsoc \@makecaption |
|
1753 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference |
|
1754 \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% |
|
1755 % test if is a for a figure or table |
|
1756 \ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% |
|
1757 % if a table, do table caption |
|
1758 \normalsize\begin{center}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}\end{center}% |
|
1759 \@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace |
|
1760 % if not a table, format it as a figure |
|
1761 \else |
|
1762 \@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace |
|
1763 \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}% |
|
1764 \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize% |
|
1765 % if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around |
|
1766 \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ }% |
|
1767 \parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% |
|
1768 % if caption is shorter than a line, center |
|
1769 \else% |
|
1770 \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% |
|
1771 \fi\fi} |
|
1772 \else% nonconference compsoc |
|
1773 \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% |
|
1774 % test if is a for a figure or table |
|
1775 \ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% |
|
1776 % if a table, do table caption |
|
1777 \normalsize\begin{center}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #1}\\{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #2}\end{center}% |
|
1778 \@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace |
|
1779 % if not a table, format it as a figure |
|
1780 \else |
|
1781 \@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace |
|
1782 \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}% |
|
1783 \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize% |
|
1784 % if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around |
|
1785 \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ }% |
|
1786 \parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% |
|
1787 % if caption is shorter than a line, left justify |
|
1788 \else% |
|
1789 \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% |
|
1790 \fi\fi} |
|
1791 \fi |
|
1792 |
|
1793 \else% traditional noncompsoc \@makecaption |
|
1794 \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% |
|
1795 % test if is a for a figure or table |
|
1796 \ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% |
|
1797 % if a table, do table caption |
|
1798 \footnotesize\begin{center}{\normalfont\footnotesize #1}\\{\normalfont\footnotesize\scshape #2}\end{center}% |
|
1799 \@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace |
|
1800 % if not a table, format it as a figure |
|
1801 \else |
|
1802 \@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace |
|
1803 % 3/2001 use footnotesize, not small; use two nonbreaking spaces, not one |
|
1804 \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}~~ #2}% |
|
1805 \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize% |
|
1806 % if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around |
|
1807 \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}~~ }% |
|
1808 \parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\footnotesize\noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% |
|
1809 % if caption is shorter than a line, center if conference, left justify otherwise |
|
1810 \else% |
|
1811 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% |
|
1812 \else \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% |
|
1813 \fi\fi\fi} |
|
1814 \fi |
|
1815 |
|
1816 |
|
1817 |
|
1818 % V1.7 disable captions class option, do so in a way that retains operation of \label |
|
1819 % within \caption |
|
1820 \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff |
|
1821 \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\vspace*{2em}\footnotesize\begin{center}{\footnotesize #1}\end{center}% |
|
1822 \let\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave\label |
|
1823 \let\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax |
|
1824 \def\label##1{\gdef\@IEEEtemplabelargsave{##1}}% |
|
1825 \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#2}% |
|
1826 \let\label\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave |
|
1827 \ifx\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax\else\label{\@IEEEtemplabelargsave}\fi} |
|
1828 \fi |
|
1829 |
|
1830 |
|
1831 % V1.7 define end environments with \def not \let so as to work OK with |
|
1832 % preview-latex |
|
1833 \newcounter{figure} |
|
1834 \def\thefigure{\@arabic\c@figure} |
|
1835 \def\fps@figure{tbp} |
|
1836 \def\ftype@figure{1} |
|
1837 \def\ext@figure{lof} |
|
1838 \def\fnum@figure{\figurename~\thefigure} |
|
1839 \def\figure{\@float{figure}} |
|
1840 \def\endfigure{\end@float} |
|
1841 \@namedef{figure*}{\@dblfloat{figure}} |
|
1842 \@namedef{endfigure*}{\end@dblfloat} |
|
1843 \newcounter{table} |
|
1844 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
|
1845 \def\thetable{\arabic{table}} |
|
1846 \else |
|
1847 \def\thetable{\@Roman\c@table} |
|
1848 \fi |
|
1849 \def\fps@table{tbp} |
|
1850 \def\ftype@table{2} |
|
1851 \def\ext@table{lot} |
|
1852 \def\fnum@table{\tablename~\thetable} |
|
1853 % V1.6 IEEE uses 8pt text for tables |
|
1854 % to default to footnotesize, we hack into LaTeX2e's \@floatboxreset and pray |
|
1855 \def\table{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@float{table}} |
|
1856 \def\endtable{\end@float} |
|
1857 % v1.6b double column tables need to default to footnotesize as well. |
|
1858 \@namedef{table*}{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@dblfloat{table}} |
|
1859 \@namedef{endtable*}{\end@dblfloat} |
|
1860 |
|
1861 |
|
1862 |
|
1863 |
|
1864 %% |
|
1865 %% START OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS |
|
1866 %% |
|
1867 %% Inspired by the concepts, examples, and previous works of LaTeX |
|
1868 %% coders and developers such as Donald Arseneau, Fred Bartlett, |
|
1869 %% David Carlisle, Tony Liu, Frank Mittelbach, Piet van Oostrum, |
|
1870 %% Roland Winkler and Mark Wooding. |
|
1871 %% I don't make the claim that my work here is even near their calibre. ;) |
|
1872 |
|
1873 |
|
1874 % hook to allow easy changeover to IEEEtran.cls/tools.sty error reporting |
|
1875 \def\@IEEEclspkgerror{\ClassError{IEEEtran}} |
|
1876 |
|
1877 \newif\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform% flag to indicate if the environment was called as the star form |
|
1878 \@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse |
|
1879 |
|
1880 \newif\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt% tracks if the environment should advance the col counter |
|
1881 % allows a way to make an \IEEEeqnarraybox that can be used within an \IEEEeqnarray |
|
1882 % used by IEEEeqnarraymulticol so that it can work properly in both |
|
1883 \@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue |
|
1884 |
|
1885 \newcount\@IEEEeqnnumcols % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols are defined |
|
1886 \newcount\@IEEEeqncolcnt % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols the user actually used |
|
1887 |
|
1888 |
|
1889 % The default math style used by the columns |
|
1890 \def\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{\displaystyle} |
|
1891 % The default text style used by the columns |
|
1892 % default to using the current font |
|
1893 \def\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle{\relax} |
|
1894 |
|
1895 % like the iedlistdecl but for \IEEEeqnarray |
|
1896 \def\IEEEeqnarraydecl{\relax} |
|
1897 \def\IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl{\relax} |
|
1898 |
|
1899 % \yesnumber is the opposite of \nonumber |
|
1900 % a novel concept with the same def as the equationarray package |
|
1901 % However, we give IEEE versions too since some LaTeX packages such as |
|
1902 % the MDWtools mathenv.sty redefine \nonumber to something else. |
|
1903 \providecommand{\yesnumber}{\global\@eqnswtrue} |
|
1904 \def\IEEEyesnumber{\global\@eqnswtrue} |
|
1905 \def\IEEEnonumber{\global\@eqnswfalse} |
|
1906 |
|
1907 |
|
1908 \def\IEEEyessubnumber{\global\@IEEEissubequationtrue\global\@eqnswtrue% |
|
1909 \if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% only do something inside an IEEEeqnarray |
|
1910 \if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\addtocounter{equation}{-1}\else\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{1}\fi% |
|
1911 \def\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\fi} |
|
1912 |
|
1913 % flag to indicate that an equation is a sub equation |
|
1914 \newif\if@IEEEissubequation% |
|
1915 \@IEEEissubequationfalse |
|
1916 |
|
1917 % allows users to "push away" equations that get too close to the equation numbers |
|
1918 \def\IEEEeqnarraynumspace{\hphantom{\if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\else\theequationdis\fi}} |
|
1919 |
|
1920 % provides a way to span multiple columns within IEEEeqnarray environments |
|
1921 % will consider \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt before globally advancing the |
|
1922 % column counter - so as to work within \IEEEeqnarraybox |
|
1923 % usage: \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{number cols. to span}{col type}{cell text} |
|
1924 \long\def\IEEEeqnarraymulticol#1#2#3{\multispan{#1}% |
|
1925 % check if column is defined |
|
1926 \relax\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#2\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% |
|
1927 \csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#2\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% |
|
1928 \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#2\endcsname% |
|
1929 \else% if not, error and use default type |
|
1930 \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#2" in \string\IEEEeqnarraymulticol.\MessageBreak |
|
1931 Using a default centering column instead}% |
|
1932 {You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}% |
|
1933 \csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE@IEEEdefault\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% |
|
1934 \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST@IEEEdefault\endcsname% |
|
1935 \fi% |
|
1936 % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it |
|
1937 \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by #1\relax\fi} |
|
1938 |
|
1939 % like \omit, but maintains track of the column counter for \IEEEeqnarray |
|
1940 \def\IEEEeqnarrayomit{\omit\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax\fi} |
|
1941 |
|
1942 |
|
1943 % provides a way to define a letter referenced column type |
|
1944 % usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{col. type letter/name}{pre insertion text}{post insertion text} |
|
1945 \def\IEEEeqnarraydefcol#1#2#3{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#1\endcsname{#2}% |
|
1946 \expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#1\endcsname{#3}% |
|
1947 \expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname{1}} |
|
1948 |
|
1949 |
|
1950 % provides a way to define a numerically referenced inter-column glue types |
|
1951 % usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep{col. glue number}{glue definition} |
|
1952 \def\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep#1#2{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\romannumeral #1\endcsname{#2}% |
|
1953 \expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\romannumeral #1\endcsname{1}} |
|
1954 |
|
1955 |
|
1956 \def\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined{1}% just a macro for 1, used for checking undefined column types |
|
1957 |
|
1958 |
|
1959 % expands and appends the given argument to the \@IEEEtrantmptoksA token list |
|
1960 % used to build up the \halign preamble |
|
1961 \def\@IEEEappendtoksA#1{\edef\@@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA #1}}% |
|
1962 \@@IEEEappendtoksA} |
|
1963 |
|
1964 % also appends to \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, but does not expand the argument |
|
1965 % uses \toks8 as a scratchpad register |
|
1966 \def\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA#1{\toks8={#1}% |
|
1967 \edef\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\the\toks8}}% |
|
1968 \@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA} |
|
1969 |
|
1970 % define some common column types for the user |
|
1971 % math |
|
1972 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{l}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} |
|
1973 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{c}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} |
|
1974 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{r}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$} |
|
1975 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{L}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil} |
|
1976 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{C}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil} |
|
1977 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{R}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$} |
|
1978 % text |
|
1979 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{s}{\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil} |
|
1980 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{t}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil} |
|
1981 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{u}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{} |
|
1982 |
|
1983 % vertical rules |
|
1984 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{v}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} |
|
1985 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{vv}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} |
|
1986 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{V}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} |
|
1987 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{VV}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}% |
|
1988 {\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} |
|
1989 |
|
1990 % horizontal rules |
|
1991 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{h}{}{\leaders\hrule height\arrayrulewidth\hfil} |
|
1992 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{H}{}{\leaders\vbox{\hrule width\arrayrulewidth\vskip\doublerulesep\hrule width\arrayrulewidth}\hfil} |
|
1993 |
|
1994 % plain |
|
1995 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{x}{}{} |
|
1996 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{X}{$}{$} |
|
1997 |
|
1998 % the default column type to use in the event a column type is not defined |
|
1999 \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{@IEEEdefault}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} |
|
2000 |
|
2001 |
|
2002 % a zero tabskip (used for "-" col types) |
|
2003 \def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero{0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt} |
|
2004 % a centering tabskip (used for "+" col types) |
|
2005 \def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter{1000pt plus 0pt minus 1000pt} |
|
2006 |
|
2007 % top level default tabskip glues for the start, end, and inter-column |
|
2008 % may be reset within environments not always at the top level, e.g., \IEEEeqnarraybox |
|
2009 \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default start glue |
|
2010 \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default end glue |
|
2011 \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue |
|
2012 |
|
2013 |
|
2014 |
|
2015 % creates a vertical rule that extends from the bottom to the top a a cell |
|
2016 % Provided in case other packages redefine \vline some other way. |
|
2017 % usage: \IEEEeqnarrayvrule[rule thickness] |
|
2018 % If no argument is provided, \arrayrulewidth will be used for the rule thickness. |
|
2019 \newcommand\IEEEeqnarrayvrule[1][\arrayrulewidth]{\vrule\@width#1\relax} |
|
2020 |
|
2021 % creates a blank separator row |
|
2022 % usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[separation length][font size commands] |
|
2023 % default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax] |
|
2024 % blank arguments inherit the default values |
|
2025 % uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers |
|
2026 \def\IEEEeqnarrayseprow{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}} |
|
2027 \def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][\relax]}} |
|
2028 \def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}% |
|
2029 \ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty% |
|
2030 % get the skip value, based on the font commands |
|
2031 % use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3 |
|
2032 % assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes |
|
2033 {\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}% |
|
2034 \else% |
|
2035 {\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}% |
|
2036 \fi% |
|
2037 \@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} |
|
2038 |
|
2039 % creates a blank separator row, but omits all the column templates |
|
2040 % usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[separation length][font size commands] |
|
2041 % default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax] |
|
2042 % blank arguments inherit the default values |
|
2043 % uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers |
|
2044 \def\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols |
|
2045 % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it |
|
2046 \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% |
|
2047 \@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}} |
|
2048 \def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][\relax]}} |
|
2049 \def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}% |
|
2050 \ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty% |
|
2051 % get the skip value, based on the font commands |
|
2052 % use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3 |
|
2053 % assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes |
|
2054 {\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}% |
|
2055 \else% |
|
2056 {\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}% |
|
2057 \fi% |
|
2058 \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} |
|
2059 |
|
2060 |
|
2061 |
|
2062 % draws a single rule across all the columns optional |
|
2063 % argument determines the rule width, \arrayrulewidth is the default |
|
2064 % updates column counter as needed and turns off struts |
|
2065 % usage: \IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[rule line thickness] |
|
2066 \def\IEEEeqnarrayrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols |
|
2067 % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it |
|
2068 \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% |
|
2069 \@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}} |
|
2070 \def\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]{\leaders\hrule height#1\hfil\relax% put in our rule |
|
2071 % turn off any struts |
|
2072 \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} |
|
2073 |
|
2074 |
|
2075 % draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator row, and then |
|
2076 % another single rule row |
|
2077 % first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default |
|
2078 % second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default |
|
2079 % usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing] |
|
2080 \def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols |
|
2081 % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it |
|
2082 \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% |
|
2083 \@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}} |
|
2084 \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]}% |
|
2085 {\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][\doublerulesep]}} |
|
2086 \def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% |
|
2087 % we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][] |
|
2088 \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% |
|
2089 \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% |
|
2090 \else% |
|
2091 \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]\relax% |
|
2092 \fi% |
|
2093 \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}% |
|
2094 \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% |
|
2095 \\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[\doublerulesep][\relax]% |
|
2096 \else% |
|
2097 \\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#2][\relax]% |
|
2098 \fi% |
|
2099 \\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}% |
|
2100 % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it |
|
2101 \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% |
|
2102 \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% |
|
2103 \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% |
|
2104 \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% |
|
2105 \else% |
|
2106 \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% |
|
2107 \fi% |
|
2108 } |
|
2109 |
|
2110 % draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator (cutting) row, and then |
|
2111 % another single rule row |
|
2112 % first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default |
|
2113 % second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default |
|
2114 % usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing] |
|
2115 \def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols |
|
2116 % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it |
|
2117 \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% |
|
2118 \@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[\arrayrulewidth]}} |
|
2119 \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]}% |
|
2120 {\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][\doublerulesep]}} |
|
2121 \def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% |
|
2122 % we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][] |
|
2123 \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% |
|
2124 \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% |
|
2125 \else% |
|
2126 \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% |
|
2127 \fi% |
|
2128 \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}% |
|
2129 \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% |
|
2130 \\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[\doublerulesep][\relax]% |
|
2131 \else% |
|
2132 \\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#2][\relax]% |
|
2133 \fi% |
|
2134 \\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}% |
|
2135 % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it |
|
2136 \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% |
|
2137 \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% |
|
2138 \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% |
|
2139 \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% |
|
2140 \else% |
|
2141 \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% |
|
2142 \fi% |
|
2143 } |
|
2144 |
|
2145 |
|
2146 |
|
2147 % inserts a full row's worth of &'s |
|
2148 % relies on \@IEEEeqnnumcols to provide the correct number of columns |
|
2149 % uses \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, \count0 as scratch registers |
|
2150 \def\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}\count0=1\relax% |
|
2151 \loop% add cols if the user did not use them all |
|
2152 \ifnum\count0<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax% |
|
2153 \@IEEEappendtoksA{&}% |
|
2154 \advance\count0 by 1\relax% update the col count |
|
2155 \repeat% |
|
2156 \the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%execute the &'s |
|
2157 } |
|
2158 |
|
2159 |
|
2160 |
|
2161 \newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner % flag to indicate if we are within the lines |
|
2162 \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % of an IEEEeqnarray - after the IEEEeqnarraydecl |
|
2163 |
|
2164 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{0pt} % height and depth of IEEEeqnarray struts |
|
2165 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{0pt} |
|
2166 |
|
2167 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{0pt} % default height and depth of |
|
2168 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{0pt} % struts within an IEEEeqnarray |
|
2169 |
|
2170 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{0pt} % saved master strut height |
|
2171 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{0pt} % and depth |
|
2172 |
|
2173 \newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut % flag to indicate that the master strut value |
|
2174 \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue % is to be used |
|
2175 |
|
2176 |
|
2177 |
|
2178 % saves the strut height and depth of the master strut |
|
2179 \def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave{\relax% |
|
2180 \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% |
|
2181 \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% |
|
2182 % remove stretchability |
|
2183 \dimen0\skip0\relax% |
|
2184 \dimen2\skip2\relax% |
|
2185 % save values |
|
2186 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{\the\dimen0}% |
|
2187 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{\the\dimen2}} |
|
2188 |
|
2189 % restores the strut height and depth of the master strut |
|
2190 \def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore{\relax% |
|
2191 \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE\relax% |
|
2192 \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE\relax% |
|
2193 % remove stretchability |
|
2194 \dimen0\skip0\relax% |
|
2195 \dimen2\skip2\relax% |
|
2196 % restore values |
|
2197 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
|
2198 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}} |
|
2199 |
|
2200 |
|
2201 % globally restores the strut height and depth to the |
|
2202 % master values and sets the master strut flag to true |
|
2203 \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset{\relax% |
|
2204 \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% |
|
2205 \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% |
|
2206 % remove stretchability |
|
2207 \dimen0\skip0\relax% |
|
2208 \dimen2\skip2\relax% |
|
2209 % restore values |
|
2210 \xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
|
2211 \xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% |
|
2212 \global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue} |
|
2213 |
|
2214 |
|
2215 % if the master strut is not to be used, make the current |
|
2216 % values of \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight, \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth |
|
2217 % and the use master strut flag, global |
|
2218 % this allows user strut commands issued in the last column to be carried |
|
2219 % into the isolation/strut column |
|
2220 \def\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus{\relax% |
|
2221 \if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut\else% |
|
2222 \xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight}% |
|
2223 \xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth}% |
|
2224 \global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% |
|
2225 \fi} |
|
2226 |
|
2227 |
|
2228 |
|
2229 % usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{height}{depth}[font size commands] |
|
2230 % If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, sets the height |
|
2231 % and depth of both the master and local struts. If called inside |
|
2232 % an IEEEeqnarray line, sets the height and depth of the local strut |
|
2233 % only and sets the flag to indicate the use of the local strut |
|
2234 % values. If the height or depth is left blank, 0.7\normalbaselineskip |
|
2235 % and 0.3\normalbaselineskip will be used, respectively. |
|
2236 % The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under |
|
2237 % a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current |
|
2238 % font is used. |
|
2239 % uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2 |
|
2240 \def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}[\relax]}} |
|
2241 \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#1}% |
|
2242 \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty% |
|
2243 {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.7\normalbaselineskip}}% |
|
2244 \skip0=\skip3\relax% |
|
2245 \else% arg one present |
|
2246 {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1\relax}}% |
|
2247 \skip0=\skip3\relax% |
|
2248 \fi% if null arg |
|
2249 \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#2}% |
|
2250 \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty% |
|
2251 {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.3\normalbaselineskip}}% |
|
2252 \skip2=\skip3\relax% |
|
2253 \else% arg two present |
|
2254 {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2\relax}}% |
|
2255 \skip2=\skip3\relax% |
|
2256 \fi% if null arg |
|
2257 % remove stretchability, just to be safe |
|
2258 \dimen0\skip0\relax% |
|
2259 \dimen2\skip2\relax% |
|
2260 % dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth |
|
2261 \if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size |
|
2262 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
|
2263 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% |
|
2264 \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master |
|
2265 \else% outer, have to set master strut too |
|
2266 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
|
2267 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% |
|
2268 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
|
2269 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% |
|
2270 \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut |
|
2271 \fi} |
|
2272 |
|
2273 |
|
2274 % usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{added height}{added depth}[font size commands] |
|
2275 % If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, adds the given height |
|
2276 % and depth to both the master and local struts. |
|
2277 % If called inside an IEEEeqnarray line, adds the given height and depth |
|
2278 % to the local strut only and sets the flag to indicate the use |
|
2279 % of the local strut values. |
|
2280 % In both cases, if a height or depth is left blank, 0pt is used instead. |
|
2281 % The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under |
|
2282 % a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current |
|
2283 % font is used. |
|
2284 % uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2 |
|
2285 \def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}[\relax]}} |
|
2286 \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#1}% |
|
2287 \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty% |
|
2288 \skip0=0pt\relax% |
|
2289 \else% arg one present |
|
2290 {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1}}% |
|
2291 \skip0=\skip3\relax% |
|
2292 \fi% if null arg |
|
2293 \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#2}% |
|
2294 \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty% |
|
2295 \skip2=0pt\relax% |
|
2296 \else% arg two present |
|
2297 {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2}}% |
|
2298 \skip2=\skip3\relax% |
|
2299 \fi% if null arg |
|
2300 % remove stretchability, just to be safe |
|
2301 \dimen0\skip0\relax% |
|
2302 \dimen2\skip2\relax% |
|
2303 % dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth |
|
2304 \if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size |
|
2305 % get local strut size |
|
2306 \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax% |
|
2307 \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax% |
|
2308 % add it to the user supplied values |
|
2309 \advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax% |
|
2310 \advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax% |
|
2311 % update the local strut size |
|
2312 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
|
2313 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% |
|
2314 \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master |
|
2315 \else% outer, have to set master strut too |
|
2316 % get master strut size |
|
2317 \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% |
|
2318 \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% |
|
2319 % add it to the user supplied values |
|
2320 \advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax% |
|
2321 \advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax% |
|
2322 % update the local and master strut sizes |
|
2323 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
|
2324 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% |
|
2325 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
|
2326 \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% |
|
2327 \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut |
|
2328 \fi} |
|
2329 |
|
2330 |
|
2331 % allow user a way to see the struts |
|
2332 \newif\ifIEEEvisiblestruts |
|
2333 \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse |
|
2334 |
|
2335 % inserts an invisible strut using the master or local strut values |
|
2336 % uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \dimen0, \dimen2 |
|
2337 \def\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut{\relax% |
|
2338 \if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut |
|
2339 % get master strut size |
|
2340 \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% |
|
2341 \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% |
|
2342 \else% |
|
2343 % get local strut size |
|
2344 \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax% |
|
2345 \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax% |
|
2346 \fi% |
|
2347 % remove stretchability, probably not needed |
|
2348 \dimen0\skip0\relax% |
|
2349 \dimen2\skip2\relax% |
|
2350 % dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth |
|
2351 % allow user to see struts if desired |
|
2352 \ifIEEEvisiblestruts% |
|
2353 \vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax% |
|
2354 \else% |
|
2355 \vrule width0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi} |
|
2356 |
|
2357 |
|
2358 % creates an invisible strut, useable even outside \IEEEeqnarray |
|
2359 % if \IEEEvisiblestrutstrue, the strut will be visible and 0.2pt wide. |
|
2360 % usage: \IEEEstrut[height][depth][font size commands] |
|
2361 % default is \IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip][0.3\normalbaselineskip][\relax] |
|
2362 % blank arguments inherit the default values |
|
2363 % uses \dimen0, \dimen2, \skip0, \skip2 |
|
2364 \def\IEEEstrut{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEstrut}{\@IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip]}} |
|
2365 \def\@IEEEstrut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEstrut[#1]}{\@@IEEEstrut[#1][0.3\normalbaselineskip]}} |
|
2366 \def\@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]}{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][\relax]}} |
|
2367 \def\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][#3]{\mbox{#3\relax% |
|
2368 \def\@IEEEstrutARG{#1}% |
|
2369 \ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty% |
|
2370 \skip0=0.7\normalbaselineskip\relax% |
|
2371 \else% |
|
2372 \skip0=#1\relax% |
|
2373 \fi% |
|
2374 \def\@IEEEstrutARG{#2}% |
|
2375 \ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty% |
|
2376 \skip2=0.3\normalbaselineskip\relax% |
|
2377 \else% |
|
2378 \skip2=#2\relax% |
|
2379 \fi% |
|
2380 % remove stretchability, probably not needed |
|
2381 \dimen0\skip0\relax% |
|
2382 \dimen2\skip2\relax% |
|
2383 \ifIEEEvisiblestruts% |
|
2384 \vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax% |
|
2385 \else% |
|
2386 \vrule width0.0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}} |
|
2387 |
|
2388 |
|
2389 % enables strut mode by setting a default strut size and then zeroing the |
|
2390 % \baselineskip, \lineskip, \lineskiplimit and \jot |
|
2391 \def\IEEEeqnarraystrutmode{\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0.7\normalbaselineskip}{0.3\normalbaselineskip}[\relax]% |
|
2392 \baselineskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt\lineskiplimit=0pt\jot=0pt} |
|
2393 |
|
2394 |
|
2395 |
|
2396 \def\IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarray} |
|
2397 \def\endIEEEeqnarray{\end@IEEEeqnarray} |
|
2398 |
|
2399 \@namedef{IEEEeqnarray*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarray} |
|
2400 \@namedef{endIEEEeqnarray*}{\end@IEEEeqnarray} |
|
2401 |
|
2402 |
|
2403 % \IEEEeqnarray is an enhanced \eqnarray. |
|
2404 % The star form defaults to not putting equation numbers at the end of each row. |
|
2405 % usage: \IEEEeqnarray[decl]{cols} |
|
2406 \def\@IEEEeqnarray{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarray}{\@@IEEEeqnarray[\relax]}} |
|
2407 \def\@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]#2{% |
|
2408 % default to showing the equation number or not based on whether or not |
|
2409 % the star form was involked |
|
2410 \if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse |
|
2411 \else% not the star form |
|
2412 \global\@eqnswtrue |
|
2413 \fi% if star form |
|
2414 \@IEEEissubequationfalse% default to no subequations |
|
2415 \@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse% assume last line is not a sub equation |
|
2416 \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse% not yet within the lines of the halign |
|
2417 \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default |
|
2418 \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise |
|
2419 \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off |
|
2420 % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it |
|
2421 \lineskip=0pt\relax |
|
2422 \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax |
|
2423 \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax% |
|
2424 \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax% |
|
2425 \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math |
|
2426 \@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue% advance the col counter for each col the user uses, |
|
2427 % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build |
|
2428 \stepcounter{equation}% advance equation counter before first line |
|
2429 \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% no subequation yet |
|
2430 \def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}% redefine the ref label |
|
2431 \IEEEeqnarraydecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides |
|
2432 #1\relax% allow user to override defaults |
|
2433 \let\\\@IEEEeqnarraycr% replace newline with one that can put in eqn. numbers |
|
2434 \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@% col. count = 0 for first line |
|
2435 \@IEEEbuildpreamble #2\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA |
|
2436 % put in the column for the equation number |
|
2437 \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first |
|
2438 \toks0={##}% |
|
2439 % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the isolation col, this helps with error checking |
|
2440 \@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}% |
|
2441 % add the isolation column |
|
2442 \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}% |
|
2443 % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the equation number col, this helps with error checking |
|
2444 \@IEEEappendtoksA{&\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}% |
|
2445 % add the equation number col to the preamble |
|
2446 \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss\the\toks0\egroup}% |
|
2447 % note \@IEEEeqnnumcols does not count the equation col or isolation col |
|
2448 % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build |
|
2449 \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax |
|
2450 % begin the display alignment |
|
2451 \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines |
|
2452 $$\everycr{}\halign to\displaywidth\bgroup |
|
2453 % "exspand" the preamble |
|
2454 \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr} |
|
2455 |
|
2456 % enter isolation/strut column (or the next column if the user did not use |
|
2457 % every column), record the strut status, complete the columns, do the strut if needed, |
|
2458 % restore counters to correct values and exit |
|
2459 \def\end@IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&\@@IEEEeqnarraycr\egroup% |
|
2460 \if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\global\advance\c@IEEEsubequation\m@ne\fi% |
|
2461 \global\advance\c@equation\m@ne% |
|
2462 $$\@ignoretrue} |
|
2463 |
|
2464 % need a way to remember if last line is a subequation |
|
2465 \newif\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation% |
|
2466 \@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse |
|
2467 |
|
2468 % IEEEeqnarray uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to |
|
2469 % end rows. This allows for things like \\*[vskip amount] |
|
2470 % This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray |
|
2471 % the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid |
|
2472 % altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the next column |
|
2473 % as there is an isolation/strut column after the user's columns |
|
2474 \def\@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&% save strut status and advance to next column |
|
2475 {\ifnum0=`}\fi |
|
2476 \@ifstar{% |
|
2477 \global\@eqpen\@M\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR |
|
2478 }{% |
|
2479 \global\@eqpen\interdisplaylinepenalty \@IEEEeqnarrayYCR |
|
2480 }% |
|
2481 } |
|
2482 |
|
2483 \def\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR\z@skip} |
|
2484 |
|
2485 \def\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR[#1]{% |
|
2486 \ifnum0=`{\fi}% |
|
2487 \@@IEEEeqnarraycr |
|
2488 \noalign{\penalty\@eqpen\vskip\jot\vskip #1\relax}}% |
|
2489 |
|
2490 \def\@@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register |
|
2491 \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by -1\relax% adjust col count because of the isolation column |
|
2492 \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt>\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax |
|
2493 \@IEEEclspkgerror{Too many columns within the IEEEeqnarray\MessageBreak |
|
2494 environment}% |
|
2495 {Use fewer \string &'s or put more columns in the IEEEeqnarry column\MessageBreak |
|
2496 specifications.}\relax% |
|
2497 \else |
|
2498 \loop% add cols if the user did not use them all |
|
2499 \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax |
|
2500 \@IEEEappendtoksA{&}% |
|
2501 \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax% update the col count |
|
2502 \repeat |
|
2503 % this number of &'s will take us the the isolation column |
|
2504 \fi |
|
2505 % execute the &'s |
|
2506 \the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA% |
|
2507 % handle the strut/isolation column |
|
2508 \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do the strut if needed |
|
2509 \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray |
|
2510 &% and enter the equation number column |
|
2511 % is this line needs an equation number, display it and advance the |
|
2512 % (sub)equation counters, record what type this line was |
|
2513 \if@eqnsw% |
|
2514 \if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\addtocounter{equation}{1}\stepcounter{IEEEsubequation}% |
|
2515 \global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationtrue% |
|
2516 \else% display a standard equation number, initialize the IEEEsubequation counter |
|
2517 \theequationdis\stepcounter{equation}\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% |
|
2518 \global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse\fi% |
|
2519 \fi% |
|
2520 % reset the eqnsw flag to indicate default preference of the display of equation numbers |
|
2521 \if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse\else\global\@eqnswtrue\fi |
|
2522 \global\@IEEEissubequationfalse% reset the subequation flag |
|
2523 % reset the number of columns the user actually used |
|
2524 \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@\relax |
|
2525 % the real end of the line |
|
2526 \cr} |
|
2527 |
|
2528 |
|
2529 |
|
2530 |
|
2531 |
|
2532 % \IEEEeqnarraybox is like \IEEEeqnarray except the box form puts everything |
|
2533 % inside a vtop, vbox, or vcenter box depending on the letter in the second |
|
2534 % optional argument (t,b,c). Vbox is the default. Unlike \IEEEeqnarray, |
|
2535 % equation numbers are not displayed and \IEEEeqnarraybox can be nested. |
|
2536 % \IEEEeqnarrayboxm is for math mode (like \array) and does not put the vbox |
|
2537 % within an hbox. |
|
2538 % \IEEEeqnarrayboxt is for text mode (like \tabular) and puts the vbox within |
|
2539 % a \hbox{$ $} construct. |
|
2540 % \IEEEeqnarraybox will auto detect whether to use \IEEEeqnarrayboxm or |
|
2541 % \IEEEeqnarrayboxt depending on the math mode. |
|
2542 % The third optional argument specifies the width this box is to be set to - |
|
2543 % natural width is the default. |
|
2544 % The * forms do not add \jot line spacing |
|
2545 % usage: \IEEEeqnarraybox[decl][pos][width]{cols} |
|
2546 \def\IEEEeqnarrayboxm{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
|
2547 \def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxm{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
|
2548 \@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
|
2549 \@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
|
2550 |
|
2551 \def\IEEEeqnarrayboxt{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
|
2552 \def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxt{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
|
2553 \@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
|
2554 \@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
|
2555 |
|
2556 \def\IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi% |
|
2557 \@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
|
2558 \def\endIEEEeqnarraybox{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
|
2559 |
|
2560 \@namedef{IEEEeqnarraybox*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi% |
|
2561 \@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
|
2562 \@namedef{endIEEEeqnarraybox*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
|
2563 |
|
2564 % flag to indicate if the \IEEEeqnarraybox needs to put things into an hbox{$ $} |
|
2565 % for \vcenter in non-math mode |
|
2566 \newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW% |
|
2567 \@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse |
|
2568 |
|
2569 \def\@IEEEeqnarraybox{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox}{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[\relax]}} |
|
2570 \def\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]}{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][b]}} |
|
2571 \def\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]}{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][\relax]}} |
|
2572 |
|
2573 % #1 = decl; #2 = t,b,c; #3 = width, #4 = col specs |
|
2574 \def\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][#3]#4{\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % not yet within the lines of the halign |
|
2575 \@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave% save current master strut values |
|
2576 \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default |
|
2577 \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise |
|
2578 \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off |
|
2579 % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it |
|
2580 \lineskip=0pt\relax% |
|
2581 \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax% |
|
2582 \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax% |
|
2583 \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax% |
|
2584 \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math |
|
2585 % the default end glues are zero for an \IEEEeqnarraybox |
|
2586 \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default start glue |
|
2587 \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default end glue |
|
2588 \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue |
|
2589 \@advanceIEEEeqncolcntfalse% do not advance the col counter for each col the user uses, |
|
2590 % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build |
|
2591 \IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides |
|
2592 #1\relax% allow user to override defaults |
|
2593 \let\\\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr% replace newline with one that allows optional spacing |
|
2594 \@IEEEbuildpreamble #4\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA |
|
2595 % add an isolation column to the preamble to stop \\'s {} from getting into the last col |
|
2596 \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first |
|
2597 \toks0={##}% |
|
2598 % add the isolation column to the preamble |
|
2599 \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}% |
|
2600 % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build |
|
2601 \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax |
|
2602 % begin the alignment |
|
2603 \everycr{}% |
|
2604 % use only the very first token to determine the positioning |
|
2605 % this stops some problems when the user uses more than one letter, |
|
2606 % but is probably not worth the effort |
|
2607 % \noindent is used as a delimiter |
|
2608 \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% |
|
2609 \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#2\relax\relax\noindent |
|
2610 % \@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded |
|
2611 % if we need to put things into and hbox and go into math mode, do so now |
|
2612 \if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW \leavevmode \hbox \bgroup $\fi% |
|
2613 % use the appropriate vbox type |
|
2614 \if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken t\relax\vtop\else\if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken c\relax% |
|
2615 \vcenter\else\vbox\fi\fi\bgroup% |
|
2616 \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines |
|
2617 \ifx#3\relax\halign\else\halign to #3\relax\fi% |
|
2618 \bgroup |
|
2619 % "exspand" the preamble |
|
2620 \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr} |
|
2621 |
|
2622 % carry strut status and enter the isolation/strut column, |
|
2623 % exit from math mode if needed, and exit |
|
2624 \def\end@IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status |
|
2625 &% enter isolation/strut column |
|
2626 \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed |
|
2627 \@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore% restore the previous master strut values |
|
2628 % reset the strut system for next IEEEeqnarray |
|
2629 % (sets local strut values back to previous master strut values) |
|
2630 \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% |
|
2631 % ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox |
|
2632 \crcr\egroup\egroup% |
|
2633 % exit from math mode and close hbox if needed |
|
2634 \if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW $\egroup\fi} |
|
2635 |
|
2636 |
|
2637 |
|
2638 % IEEEeqnarraybox uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to |
|
2639 % end rows. This allows for things like \\[vskip amount] |
|
2640 % This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray |
|
2641 % For IEEEeqnarraybox, \\* is the same as \\ |
|
2642 % the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid |
|
2643 % altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the isolation/strut column |
|
2644 % carry strut status into isolation/strut column |
|
2645 \def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status |
|
2646 &% enter isolation/strut column |
|
2647 \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed |
|
2648 % reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray |
|
2649 \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% |
|
2650 {\ifnum0=`}\fi% |
|
2651 \@ifstar{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}} |
|
2652 |
|
2653 % test and setup the optional argument to \\[] |
|
2654 \def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR\z@skip} |
|
2655 |
|
2656 % IEEEeqnarraybox does not automatically increase line spacing by \jot |
|
2657 \def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}% |
|
2658 \cr\noalign{\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\else\vskip\jot\fi\vskip#1\relax}} |
|
2659 |
|
2660 |
|
2661 |
|
2662 % starts the halign preamble build |
|
2663 \def\@IEEEbuildpreamble{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register |
|
2664 \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=u%current column type is not yet known |
|
2665 \let\@IEEEBPprevtype=s%the previous column type was the start |
|
2666 \let\@IEEEBPnexttype=u%next column type is not yet known |
|
2667 % ensure these are valid |
|
2668 \def\@IEEEBPcurglue={0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}% |
|
2669 \def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}% name of current column definition |
|
2670 % currently acquired numerically referenced glue |
|
2671 % use a name that is easier to remember |
|
2672 \let\@IEEEBPcurnum=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA% |
|
2673 \@IEEEBPcurnum=0% |
|
2674 % tracks number of columns in the preamble |
|
2675 \@IEEEeqnnumcols=0% |
|
2676 % record the default end glues |
|
2677 \edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart}% |
|
2678 \edef\@IEEEBPendglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend}% |
|
2679 % now parse the user's column specifications |
|
2680 \@@IEEEbuildpreamble} |
|
2681 |
|
2682 |
|
2683 % parses and builds the halign preamble |
|
2684 \def\@@IEEEbuildpreamble#1#2{\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEbuildpreamble% |
|
2685 % use only the very first token to check the end |
|
2686 % \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here |
|
2687 \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% |
|
2688 \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent |
|
2689 \ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEfinishpreamble\else% |
|
2690 % identify current and next token type |
|
2691 \@IEEEgetcoltype{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurtype}{1}% current, error on invalid |
|
2692 \@IEEEgetcoltype{#2}{\@IEEEBPnexttype}{0}% next, no error on invalid next |
|
2693 % if curtype is a glue, get the glue def |
|
2694 \if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEgetcurglue{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurglue}\fi% |
|
2695 % if curtype is a column, get the column def and set the current column name |
|
2696 \if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEgetcurcol{#1}\fi% |
|
2697 % if curtype is a numeral, acquire the user defined glue |
|
2698 \if\@IEEEBPcurtype n\@IEEEprocessNcol{#1}\fi% |
|
2699 % process the acquired glue |
|
2700 \if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEprocessGcol\fi% |
|
2701 % process the acquired col |
|
2702 \if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEprocessCcol\fi% |
|
2703 % ready prevtype for next col spec. |
|
2704 \let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPcurtype% |
|
2705 % be sure and put back the future token(s) as a group |
|
2706 \fi\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble{#2}} |
|
2707 |
|
2708 |
|
2709 % executed just after preamble build is completed |
|
2710 % warn about zero cols, and if prevtype type = u, put in end tabskip glue |
|
2711 \def\@@IEEEfinishpreamble#1{\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols<1\relax |
|
2712 \@IEEEclspkgerror{No column specifiers declared for IEEEeqnarray}% |
|
2713 {At least one column type must be declared for each IEEEeqnarray.}% |
|
2714 \fi%num cols less than 1 |
|
2715 %if last type undefined, set default end tabskip glue |
|
2716 \if\@IEEEBPprevtype u\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue}\fi} |
|
2717 |
|
2718 |
|
2719 % Identify and return the column specifier's type code |
|
2720 \def\@IEEEgetcoltype#1#2#3{% |
|
2721 % use only the very first token to determine the type |
|
2722 % \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here |
|
2723 \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% |
|
2724 \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent |
|
2725 % \@IEEEgrabfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded |
|
2726 % n = number |
|
2727 % g = glue (any other char in catagory 12) |
|
2728 % c = letter |
|
2729 % e = \end |
|
2730 % u = undefined |
|
2731 % third argument: 0 = no error message, 1 = error on invalid char |
|
2732 \let#2=u\relax% assume invalid until know otherwise |
|
2733 \ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let#2=e\else |
|
2734 \ifcat\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\relax\else% screen out control sequences |
|
2735 \if0\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
|
2736 \if1\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
|
2737 \if2\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
|
2738 \if3\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
|
2739 \if4\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
|
2740 \if5\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
|
2741 \if6\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
|
2742 \if7\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
|
2743 \if8\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
|
2744 \if9\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
|
2745 \ifcat,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=g\relax |
|
2746 \else\ifcat a\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=c\relax\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi |
|
2747 \if#2u\relax |
|
2748 \if0\noexpand#3\relax\else\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid character in column specifications}% |
|
2749 {Only letters, numerals and certain other symbols are allowed \MessageBreak |
|
2750 as IEEEeqnarray column specifiers.}\fi\fi} |
|
2751 |
|
2752 |
|
2753 % identify the current letter referenced column |
|
2754 % if invalid, use a default column |
|
2755 \def\@IEEEgetcurcol#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% |
|
2756 \def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{#1}\else% invalid column name |
|
2757 \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#1" in column specifications.\MessageBreak |
|
2758 Using a default centering column instead}% |
|
2759 {You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}% |
|
2760 \def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}\fi} |
|
2761 |
|
2762 |
|
2763 % identify and return the predefined (punctuation) glue value |
|
2764 \def\@IEEEgetcurglue#1#2{% |
|
2765 % ! = \! (neg small) -0.16667em (-3/18 em) |
|
2766 % , = \, (small) 0.16667em ( 3/18 em) |
|
2767 % : = \: (med) 0.22222em ( 4/18 em) |
|
2768 % ; = \; (large) 0.27778em ( 5/18 em) |
|
2769 % ' = \quad 1em |
|
2770 % " = \qquad 2em |
|
2771 % . = 0.5\arraycolsep |
|
2772 % / = \arraycolsep |
|
2773 % ? = 2\arraycolsep |
|
2774 % * = 1fil |
|
2775 % + = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter |
|
2776 % - = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero |
|
2777 % Note that all em values are referenced to the math font (textfont2) fontdimen6 |
|
2778 % value for 1em. |
|
2779 % |
|
2780 % use only the very first token to determine the type |
|
2781 % this prevents errant tokens from getting in the main text |
|
2782 % \noindent is used as a delimiter here |
|
2783 \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% |
|
2784 \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent |
|
2785 % get the math font 1em value |
|
2786 % LaTeX2e's NFSS2 does not preload the fonts, but \IEEEeqnarray needs |
|
2787 % to gain access to the math (\textfont2) font's spacing parameters. |
|
2788 % So we create a bogus box here that uses the math font to ensure |
|
2789 % that \textfont2 is loaded and ready. If this is not done, |
|
2790 % the \textfont2 stuff here may not work. |
|
2791 % Thanks to Bernd Raichle for his 1997 post on this topic. |
|
2792 {\setbox0=\hbox{$\displaystyle\relax$}}% |
|
2793 % fontdimen6 has the width of 1em (a quad). |
|
2794 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\fontdimen6\textfont2\relax% |
|
2795 % identify the glue value based on the first token |
|
2796 % we discard anything after the first |
|
2797 \if!\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=-0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
|
2798 \if,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
|
2799 \if:\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.22222\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
|
2800 \if;\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.27778\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
|
2801 \if'\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
|
2802 \if"\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
|
2803 \if.\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.5\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
|
2804 \if/\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\the\arraycolsep}\else |
|
2805 \if?\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
|
2806 \if *\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{0pt plus 1fil minus 0pt}\else |
|
2807 \if+\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}\else |
|
2808 \if-\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}\else |
|
2809 \edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% |
|
2810 \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid predefined inter-column glue type "#1" in\MessageBreak |
|
2811 column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak |
|
2812 0pt instead}% |
|
2813 {Only !,:;'"./?*+ and - are valid predefined glue types in the\MessageBreak |
|
2814 IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} |
|
2815 |
|
2816 |
|
2817 |
|
2818 % process a numerical digit from the column specification |
|
2819 % and look up the corresponding user defined glue value |
|
2820 % can transform current type from n to g or a as the user defined glue is acquired |
|
2821 \def\@IEEEprocessNcol#1{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g% |
|
2822 \@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak |
|
2823 specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak |
|
2824 after the first}% |
|
2825 {You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak |
|
2826 in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}% |
|
2827 \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue, future digits will be discarded |
|
2828 \@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax% |
|
2829 \else% if we previously aborted a glue |
|
2830 \if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain digit abortion |
|
2831 \else%acquire this number |
|
2832 % save the previous type before the numerical digits started |
|
2833 \if\@IEEEBPprevtype n\else\let\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype=\@IEEEBPprevtype\fi% |
|
2834 \multiply\@IEEEBPcurnum by 10\relax% |
|
2835 \advance\@IEEEBPcurnum by #1\relax% add in number, \relax is needed to stop TeX's number scan |
|
2836 \if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else%close acquisition |
|
2837 \expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% |
|
2838 \edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname}% |
|
2839 \else%user glue not defined |
|
2840 \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid user defined inter-column glue type "\number\@IEEEBPcurnum" in\MessageBreak |
|
2841 column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak |
|
2842 0pt instead}% |
|
2843 {You must define all IEEEeqnarray numerical inter-column glue types via\MessageBreak |
|
2844 \string\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep \space before they are used in column specifications.}% |
|
2845 \edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% |
|
2846 \fi% glue defined or not |
|
2847 \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=g% change the type to reflect the acquired glue |
|
2848 \let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype% restore the prev type before this number glue |
|
2849 \@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%ready for next acquisition |
|
2850 \fi%close acquisition, get glue |
|
2851 \fi%discard or acquire number |
|
2852 \fi%prevtype glue or not |
|
2853 } |
|
2854 |
|
2855 |
|
2856 % process an acquired glue |
|
2857 % add any acquired column/glue pair to the preamble |
|
2858 \def\@IEEEprocessGcol{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain previous glue abortions |
|
2859 \else |
|
2860 % if this is the start glue, save it, but do nothing else |
|
2861 % as this is not used in the preamble, but before |
|
2862 \if\@IEEEBPprevtype s\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEBPcurglue}% |
|
2863 \else%not the start glue |
|
2864 \if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%ignore if back to back glues |
|
2865 \@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak |
|
2866 specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak |
|
2867 after the first}% |
|
2868 {You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak |
|
2869 in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}% |
|
2870 \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue |
|
2871 \else% not a back to back glue |
|
2872 \if\@IEEEBPprevtype c\relax% if the previoustype was a col, add column/glue pair to preamble |
|
2873 \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi |
|
2874 \toks0={##}% |
|
2875 % make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this |
|
2876 \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi |
|
2877 % insert the column defintion into the preamble, being careful not to expand |
|
2878 % the column definition |
|
2879 \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPcurglue}% |
|
2880 \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}% |
|
2881 \@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% |
|
2882 \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}% |
|
2883 \@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}% |
|
2884 \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% |
|
2885 \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}% |
|
2886 \@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% |
|
2887 \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% |
|
2888 \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}% |
|
2889 \advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble |
|
2890 \else% error: non-start glue with no pending column |
|
2891 \@IEEEclspkgerror{Inter-column glue specifier without a prior column\MessageBreak |
|
2892 type in the column specifications. Ignoring this glue\MessageBreak |
|
2893 specifier}% |
|
2894 {Except for the first and last positions, glue can be placed only\MessageBreak |
|
2895 between column types.}% |
|
2896 \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue |
|
2897 \fi% previous was a column |
|
2898 \fi% back-to-back glues |
|
2899 \fi% is start column glue |
|
2900 \fi% prev type not a |
|
2901 } |
|
2902 |
|
2903 |
|
2904 % process an acquired letter referenced column and, if necessary, add it to the preamble |
|
2905 \def\@IEEEprocessCcol{\if\@IEEEBPnexttype g\else |
|
2906 \if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else |
|
2907 % we have a column followed by something other than a glue (or numeral glue) |
|
2908 % so we must add this column to the preamble now |
|
2909 \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi%col separator for those after the first |
|
2910 \if\@IEEEBPnexttype e\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue\relax}\else%put in end glue |
|
2911 \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid\relax}\fi% or default mid glue |
|
2912 \toks0={##}% |
|
2913 % make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this |
|
2914 \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi |
|
2915 % insert the column definition into the preamble, being careful not to expand |
|
2916 % the column definition |
|
2917 \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}% |
|
2918 \@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% |
|
2919 \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}% |
|
2920 \@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}% |
|
2921 \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% |
|
2922 \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}% |
|
2923 \@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% |
|
2924 \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% |
|
2925 \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}% |
|
2926 \advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble |
|
2927 \fi%next type not numeral |
|
2928 \fi%next type not glue |
|
2929 } |
|
2930 |
|
2931 |
|
2932 %% |
|
2933 %% END OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS |
|
2934 %% |
|
2935 |
|
2936 |
|
2937 |
|
2938 |
|
2939 % set up the running headings, this complex because of all the different |
|
2940 % modes IEEEtran supports |
|
2941 \if@twoside |
|
2942 \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote |
|
2943 \def\ps@headings{% |
|
2944 \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage} |
|
2945 \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}} |
|
2946 \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
|
2947 \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot |
|
2948 \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% |
|
2949 \else |
|
2950 \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize\@date\hfil DRAFT} |
|
2951 \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil\@date} |
|
2952 \fi |
|
2953 \else |
|
2954 \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{} |
|
2955 \fi} |
|
2956 \else % not a technote |
|
2957 \def\ps@headings{% |
|
2958 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
|
2959 \def\@oddhead{} |
|
2960 \def\@evenhead{} |
|
2961 \else |
|
2962 \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\rightmark \hfil \thepage} |
|
2963 \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}} |
|
2964 \fi |
|
2965 \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
|
2966 \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\rightmark \hfil \thepage} |
|
2967 \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}} |
|
2968 \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot |
|
2969 \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% |
|
2970 \else |
|
2971 \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize\@date\hfil DRAFT} |
|
2972 \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil\@date} |
|
2973 \fi |
|
2974 \else |
|
2975 \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% |
|
2976 \fi} |
|
2977 \fi |
|
2978 \else % single side |
|
2979 \def\ps@headings{% |
|
2980 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
|
2981 \def\@oddhead{} |
|
2982 \def\@evenhead{} |
|
2983 \else |
|
2984 \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage} |
|
2985 \def\@evenhead{} |
|
2986 \fi |
|
2987 \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
|
2988 \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage} |
|
2989 \def\@evenhead{} |
|
2990 \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot |
|
2991 \def\@oddfoot{} |
|
2992 \else |
|
2993 \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date \hfil DRAFT} |
|
2994 \fi |
|
2995 \else |
|
2996 \def\@oddfoot{} |
|
2997 \fi |
|
2998 \def\@evenfoot{}} |
|
2999 \fi |
|
3000 |
|
3001 |
|
3002 % title page style |
|
3003 \def\ps@IEEEtitlepagestyle{\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% |
|
3004 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
|
3005 \def\@oddhead{}% |
|
3006 \def\@evenhead{}% |
|
3007 \else |
|
3008 \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}% |
|
3009 \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}% |
|
3010 \fi |
|
3011 \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
|
3012 \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}% |
|
3013 \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}% |
|
3014 \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else |
|
3015 \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date\hfil DRAFT}% |
|
3016 \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil \@date}% |
|
3017 \fi |
|
3018 \else |
|
3019 % all non-draft mode footers |
|
3020 \if@IEEEusingpubid |
|
3021 % for title pages that are using a pubid |
|
3022 % do not repeat pubid if using peer review option |
|
3023 \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview |
|
3024 \else |
|
3025 \footskip 0pt% |
|
3026 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsocconf |
|
3027 \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
|
3028 \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
|
3029 \else |
|
3030 \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
|
3031 \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
|
3032 \fi |
|
3033 \fi |
|
3034 \fi |
|
3035 \fi} |
|
3036 |
|
3037 |
|
3038 % peer review cover page style |
|
3039 \def\ps@IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle{% |
|
3040 \def\@oddhead{}\def\@evenhead{}% |
|
3041 \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% |
|
3042 \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
|
3043 \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else |
|
3044 \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date\hfil DRAFT}% |
|
3045 \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil \@date}% |
|
3046 \fi |
|
3047 \else |
|
3048 % non-draft mode footers |
|
3049 \if@IEEEusingpubid |
|
3050 \footskip 0pt% |
|
3051 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
|
3052 \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
|
3053 \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
|
3054 \else |
|
3055 \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
|
3056 \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
|
3057 \fi |
|
3058 \fi |
|
3059 \fi} |
|
3060 |
|
3061 |
|
3062 % start with empty headings |
|
3063 \def\rightmark{}\def\leftmark{} |
|
3064 |
|
3065 |
|
3066 %% Defines the command for putting the header. \footernote{TEXT} is the same |
|
3067 %% as \markboth{TEXT}{TEXT}. |
|
3068 %% Note that all the text is forced into uppercase, if you have some text |
|
3069 %% that needs to be in lower case, for instance et. al., then either manually |
|
3070 %% set \leftmark and \rightmark or use \MakeLowercase{et. al.} within the |
|
3071 %% arguments to \markboth. |
|
3072 \def\markboth#1#2{\def\leftmark{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\MakeUppercase{#1}}% |
|
3073 \def\rightmark{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\MakeUppercase{#2}}} |
|
3074 \def\footernote#1{\markboth{#1}{#1}} |
|
3075 |
|
3076 \def\today{\ifcase\month\or |
|
3077 January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or |
|
3078 July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi |
|
3079 \space\number\day, \number\year} |
|
3080 |
|
3081 |
|
3082 |
|
3083 |
|
3084 %% CITATION AND BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMANDS |
|
3085 %% |
|
3086 %% V1.6 no longer supports the older, nonstandard \shortcite and \citename setup stuff |
|
3087 % |
|
3088 % |
|
3089 % Modify Latex2e \@citex to separate citations with "], [" |
|
3090 \def\@citex[#1]#2{% |
|
3091 \let\@citea\@empty |
|
3092 \@cite{\@for\@citeb:=#2\do |
|
3093 {\@citea\def\@citea{], [}% |
|
3094 \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb\@empty}% |
|
3095 \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi |
|
3096 \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{\mbox{\reset@font\bfseries ?}% |
|
3097 \G@refundefinedtrue |
|
3098 \@latex@warning |
|
3099 {Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined}}% |
|
3100 {\hbox{\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname}}}}{#1}} |
|
3101 |
|
3102 % V1.6 we create hooks for the optional use of Donald Arseneau's |
|
3103 % cite.sty package. cite.sty is "smart" and will notice that the |
|
3104 % following format controls are already defined and will not |
|
3105 % redefine them. The result will be the proper sorting of the |
|
3106 % citation numbers and auto detection of 3 or more entry "ranges" - |
|
3107 % all in IEEE style: [1], [2], [5]--[7], [12] |
|
3108 % This also allows for an optional note, i.e., \cite[mynote]{..}. |
|
3109 % If the \cite with note has more than one reference, the note will |
|
3110 % be applied to the last of the listed references. It is generally |
|
3111 % desired that if a note is given, only one reference is listed in |
|
3112 % that \cite. |
|
3113 % Thanks to Mr. Arseneau for providing the required format arguments |
|
3114 % to produce the IEEE style. |
|
3115 \def\citepunct{], [} |
|
3116 \def\citedash{]--[} |
|
3117 |
|
3118 % V1.7 default to using same font for urls made by url.sty |
|
3119 \AtBeginDocument{\csname url@samestyle\endcsname} |
|
3120 |
|
3121 % V1.6 class files should always provide these |
|
3122 \def\newblock{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em} |
|
3123 \let\@openbib@code\@empty |
|
3124 |
|
3125 |
|
3126 % Provide support for the control entries of IEEEtran.bst V1.00 and later. |
|
3127 % V1.7 optional argument allows for a different aux file to be specified in |
|
3128 % order to handle multiple bibliographies. For example, with multibib.sty: |
|
3129 % \newcites{sec}{Secondary Literature} |
|
3130 % \bstctlcite[@auxoutsec]{BSTcontrolhak} |
|
3131 \def\bstctlcite{\@ifnextchar[{\@bstctlcite}{\@bstctlcite[@auxout]}} |
|
3132 \def\@bstctlcite[#1]#2{\@bsphack |
|
3133 \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{% |
|
3134 \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% |
|
3135 \if@filesw\immediate\write\csname #1\endcsname{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi}% |
|
3136 \@esphack} |
|
3137 |
|
3138 % V1.6 provide a way for a user to execute a command just before |
|
3139 % a given reference number - used to insert a \newpage to balance |
|
3140 % the columns on the last page |
|
3141 \edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{0} % the default of zero means that |
|
3142 % the command is not executed |
|
3143 \def\@IEEEtriggercmd{\newpage} |
|
3144 |
|
3145 % allow the user to alter the triggered command |
|
3146 \long\def\IEEEtriggercmd#1{\long\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{#1}} |
|
3147 |
|
3148 % allow user a way to specify the reference number just before the |
|
3149 % command is executed |
|
3150 \def\IEEEtriggeratref#1{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=#1% |
|
3151 \edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA}}% |
|
3152 |
|
3153 % trigger command at the given reference |
|
3154 \def\@IEEEbibitemprefix{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtriggerrefnum\relax% |
|
3155 \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% |
|
3156 \ifnum\c@enumiv=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax\@IEEEtriggercmd\relax\fi} |
|
3157 |
|
3158 |
|
3159 \def\@biblabel#1{[#1]} |
|
3160 |
|
3161 % compsoc journals left align the reference numbers |
|
3162 \@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]\hfill}} |
|
3163 |
|
3164 % controls bib item spacing |
|
3165 \def\IEEEbibitemsep{0pt plus .5pt} |
|
3166 |
|
3167 \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\IEEEbibitemsep{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}} |
|
3168 |
|
3169 |
|
3170 \def\thebibliography#1{\section*{\refname}% |
|
3171 \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\refname}% |
|
3172 % V1.6 add some rubber space here and provide a command trigger |
|
3173 \footnotesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\small}\vskip 0.3\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip% |
|
3174 \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% |
|
3175 {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}% |
|
3176 \leftmargin\labelwidth |
|
3177 \advance\leftmargin\labelsep\relax |
|
3178 \itemsep \IEEEbibitemsep\relax |
|
3179 \usecounter{enumiv}% |
|
3180 \let\p@enumiv\@empty |
|
3181 \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% |
|
3182 \let\@IEEElatexbibitem\bibitem% |
|
3183 \def\bibitem{\@IEEEbibitemprefix\@IEEElatexbibitem}% |
|
3184 \def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}% |
|
3185 % originally: |
|
3186 % \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000% |
|
3187 % by adding the \interlinepenalty here, we make it more |
|
3188 % difficult, but not impossible, for LaTeX to break within a reference. |
|
3189 % IEEE almost never breaks a reference (but they do it more often with |
|
3190 % technotes). You may get an underfull vbox warning around the bibliography, |
|
3191 % but the final result will be much more like what IEEE will publish. |
|
3192 % MDS 11/2000 |
|
3193 \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty100% |
|
3194 \else\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty500\fi% |
|
3195 \sfcode`\.=1000\relax} |
|
3196 \let\endthebibliography=\endlist |
|
3197 |
|
3198 |
|
3199 |
|
3200 |
|
3201 % TITLE PAGE COMMANDS |
|
3202 % |
|
3203 % |
|
3204 % \IEEEmembership is used to produce the sublargesize italic font used to indicate author |
|
3205 % IEEE membership. compsoc uses a large size sans slant font |
|
3206 \def\IEEEmembership#1{{\@IEEEnotcompsoconly{\sublargesize}\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\textit{#1}}} |
|
3207 |
|
3208 |
|
3209 % \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a footnote type symbol to indicate author affiliation. |
|
3210 % When given an argument of 1 to 9, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} follows the standard LaTeX footnote |
|
3211 % symbol sequence convention. However, for arguments 10 and above, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} |
|
3212 % reverts to using lower case roman numerals, so it cannot overflow. Do note that you |
|
3213 % cannot use \footnotemark[] in place of \IEEEauthorrefmark{} within \author as the footnote |
|
3214 % symbols will have been turned off to prevent \thanks from creating footnote marks. |
|
3215 % \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a symbol that appears to LaTeX as having zero vertical |
|
3216 % height - this allows for a more compact line packing, but the user must ensure that |
|
3217 % the interline spacing is large enough to prevent \IEEEauthorrefmark{} from colliding |
|
3218 % with the text above. |
|
3219 % V1.7 make this a robust command |
|
3220 \DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEauthorrefmark}[1]{\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\textsuperscript{\footnotesize\ensuremath{\ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or% |
|
3221 \mathsection\or \mathparagraph\or \|\or **\or \dagger\dagger% |
|
3222 \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\textsuperscript{\expandafter\romannumeral#1}\fi}}}} |
|
3223 |
|
3224 |
|
3225 % FONT CONTROLS AND SPACINGS FOR CONFERENCE MODE AUTHOR NAME AND AFFILIATION BLOCKS |
|
3226 % |
|
3227 % The default font styles for the author name and affiliation blocks (confmode) |
|
3228 %\def\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}} |
|
3229 %\def\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\itshape}\normalsize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}} |
|
3230 \def\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle{\normalfont\normalsize} |
|
3231 \def\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\itshape}\normalsize} |
|
3232 |
|
3233 % The default if the user does not use an author block |
|
3234 \def\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize} |
|
3235 |
|
3236 % spacing from title (or special paper notice) to author name blocks (confmode) |
|
3237 % can be negative |
|
3238 \def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{-0.25em} |
|
3239 % compsoc conferences need more space here |
|
3240 \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{0.75\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}} |
|
3241 |
|
3242 % spacing between name and affiliation blocks (confmode) |
|
3243 % This can be negative. |
|
3244 % IEEE doesn't want any added spacing here, but I will leave these |
|
3245 % controls in place in case they ever change their mind. |
|
3246 % Personally, I like 0.75ex. |
|
3247 %\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.75ex} |
|
3248 %\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.75ex} |
|
3249 \def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.0ex} |
|
3250 \def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.0ex} |
|
3251 % baseline spacing within name and affiliation blocks (confmode) |
|
3252 % must be positive, spacings below certain values will make |
|
3253 % the position of line of text sensitive to the contents of the |
|
3254 % line above it i.e., whether or not the prior line has descenders, |
|
3255 % subscripts, etc. For this reason it is a good idea to keep |
|
3256 % these above 2.6ex |
|
3257 \def\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace{2.6ex} |
|
3258 \def\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace{2.75ex} |
|
3259 |
|
3260 % This tracks the required strut size. |
|
3261 % See the \@IEEEauthorhalign command for the actual default value used. |
|
3262 \def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex} |
|
3263 |
|
3264 % variables to retain font size and style across groups |
|
3265 % values given here have no effect as they will be overwritten later |
|
3266 \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize{10} |
|
3267 \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip{12} |
|
3268 \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding{OT1} |
|
3269 \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily{ptm} |
|
3270 \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries{m} |
|
3271 \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape{n} |
|
3272 |
|
3273 % saves the current font attributes |
|
3274 \def\@IEEEcurfontSAVE{\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize\f@size% |
|
3275 \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip\f@baselineskip% |
|
3276 \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding\f@encoding% |
|
3277 \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily\f@family% |
|
3278 \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries\f@series% |
|
3279 \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape\f@shape} |
|
3280 |
|
3281 % restores the saved font attributes |
|
3282 \def\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE{\fontsize{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize}{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip}% |
|
3283 \fontencoding{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding}% |
|
3284 \fontfamily{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily}% |
|
3285 \fontseries{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries}% |
|
3286 \fontshape{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape}% |
|
3287 \selectfont} |
|
3288 |
|
3289 |
|
3290 % variable to indicate if the current block is the first block in the column |
|
3291 \newif\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse |
|
3292 |
|
3293 |
|
3294 % the command places a strut with height and depth = \@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace |
|
3295 % we use this technique to have complete manual control over the spacing of the lines |
|
3296 % within the halign environment. |
|
3297 % We set the below baseline portion at 30%, the above |
|
3298 % baseline portion at 70% of the total length. |
|
3299 % Responds to changes in the document's \baselinestretch |
|
3300 \def\@IEEEauthorstrutrule{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace% |
|
3301 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselinestretch\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% |
|
3302 \rule[-0.3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA]{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}} |
|
3303 |
|
3304 |
|
3305 % blocks to hold the authors' names and affilations. |
|
3306 % Makes formatting easy for conferences |
|
3307 % |
|
3308 % use real definitions in conference mode |
|
3309 % name block |
|
3310 \def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle% set the default text style |
|
3311 \gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}% disable strut for spacer row |
|
3312 % the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs |
|
3313 % for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro |
|
3314 % do a spacer row if needed |
|
3315 \if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline\fi |
|
3316 \global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column |
|
3317 %restore the correct strut value |
|
3318 \gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace}% |
|
3319 % input the author names |
|
3320 #1% |
|
3321 % end the row if the user did not already |
|
3322 \crcr} |
|
3323 % spacer row for names |
|
3324 \def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace}} |
|
3325 % |
|
3326 % affiliation block |
|
3327 \def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle% set the default text style |
|
3328 \gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}%disable strut for spacer row |
|
3329 % the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs |
|
3330 % for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro |
|
3331 % do a spacer row if needed |
|
3332 \if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline\fi |
|
3333 \global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column |
|
3334 %restore the correct strut value |
|
3335 \gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace}% |
|
3336 % input the author affiliations |
|
3337 #1% |
|
3338 % end the row if the user did not already |
|
3339 \crcr} |
|
3340 % spacer row for affiliations |
|
3341 \def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace}} |
|
3342 |
|
3343 |
|
3344 % allow papers to compile even if author blocks are used in modes other |
|
3345 % than conference or peerreviewca. For such cases, we provide dummy blocks. |
|
3346 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
|
3347 \else |
|
3348 \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca\else |
|
3349 % not conference or peerreviewca mode |
|
3350 \def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{#1}% |
|
3351 \def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{#1}% |
|
3352 \fi |
|
3353 \fi |
|
3354 |
|
3355 |
|
3356 |
|
3357 % we provide our own halign so as not to have to depend on tabular |
|
3358 \def\@IEEEauthorhalign{\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle% default text style |
|
3359 \lineskip=0pt\relax% disable line spacing |
|
3360 \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax% |
|
3361 \baselineskip=0pt\relax% |
|
3362 \@IEEEcurfontSAVE% save the current font |
|
3363 \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math |
|
3364 \let\\\@IEEEauthorhaligncr% replace newline with halign friendly one |
|
3365 \tabskip=0pt\relax% no column spacing |
|
3366 \everycr{}% ensure no problems here |
|
3367 \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse% no author blocks yet |
|
3368 \def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}% default interline space |
|
3369 \vtop\bgroup%vtop box |
|
3370 \halign\bgroup&\relax\hfil\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE\relax ##\relax |
|
3371 \hfil\@IEEEcurfontSAVE\@IEEEauthorstrutrule\cr} |
|
3372 |
|
3373 % ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox |
|
3374 \def\end@IEEEauthorhalign{\crcr\egroup\egroup} |
|
3375 |
|
3376 % handle bogus star form |
|
3377 \def\@IEEEauthorhaligncr{{\ifnum0=`}\fi\@ifstar{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}} |
|
3378 |
|
3379 % test and setup the optional argument to \\[] |
|
3380 \def\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr{\@testopt\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr\z@skip} |
|
3381 |
|
3382 % end the line and do the optional spacer |
|
3383 \def\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}\cr\noalign{\vskip#1\relax}} |
|
3384 |
|
3385 |
|
3386 |
|
3387 % flag to prevent multiple \and warning messages |
|
3388 \newif\if@IEEEWARNand |
|
3389 \@IEEEWARNandtrue |
|
3390 |
|
3391 % if in conference or peerreviewca modes, we support the use of \and as \author is a |
|
3392 % tabular environment, otherwise we warn the user that \and is invalid |
|
3393 % outside of conference or peerreviewca modes. |
|
3394 \def\and{\relax} % provide a bogus \and that we will then override |
|
3395 |
|
3396 \renewcommand{\and}[1][\relax]{\if@IEEEWARNand\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\and is valid only |
|
3397 when in conference or peerreviewca}\typeout{modes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNandfalse} |
|
3398 |
|
3399 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% |
|
3400 \renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}% |
|
3401 \fi |
|
3402 \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca |
|
3403 \renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}% |
|
3404 \fi |
|
3405 |
|
3406 |
|
3407 % page clearing command |
|
3408 % based on LaTeX2e's \cleardoublepage, but allows different page styles |
|
3409 % for the inserted blank pages |
|
3410 \def\@IEEEcleardoublepage#1{\clearpage\if@twoside\ifodd\c@page\else |
|
3411 \hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\fi\fi\fi} |
|
3412 |
|
3413 |
|
3414 % user command to invoke the title page |
|
3415 \def\maketitle{\par% |
|
3416 \begingroup% |
|
3417 \normalfont% |
|
3418 \def\thefootnote{}% the \thanks{} mark type is empty |
|
3419 \def\footnotemark{}% and kill space from \thanks within author |
|
3420 \let\@makefnmark\relax% V1.7, must *really* kill footnotemark to remove all \textsuperscript spacing as well. |
|
3421 \footnotesize% equal spacing between thanks lines |
|
3422 \footnotesep 0.7\baselineskip%see global setting of \footnotesep for more info |
|
3423 % V1.7 disable \thanks note indention for compsoc |
|
3424 \@IEEEcompsoconly{\long\def\@makefntext##1{\parindent 1em\noindent\hbox{\@makefnmark}##1}}% |
|
3425 \normalsize% |
|
3426 \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview |
|
3427 \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% |
|
3428 \thispagestyle{IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle}\@thanks% |
|
3429 \else |
|
3430 \if@twocolumn% |
|
3431 \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% |
|
3432 \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% |
|
3433 \else |
|
3434 \twocolumn[\@maketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace\@IEEEaftertitletext]% |
|
3435 \fi |
|
3436 \else |
|
3437 \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% |
|
3438 \fi |
|
3439 \thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}\@thanks% |
|
3440 \fi |
|
3441 % pullup page for pubid if used. |
|
3442 \if@IEEEusingpubid |
|
3443 \enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}% |
|
3444 \fi |
|
3445 \endgroup |
|
3446 \setcounter{footnote}{0}\let\maketitle\relax\let\@maketitle\relax |
|
3447 \gdef\@thanks{}% |
|
3448 % v1.6b do not clear these as we will need the title again for peer review papers |
|
3449 % \gdef\@author{}\gdef\@title{}% |
|
3450 \let\thanks\relax} |
|
3451 |
|
3452 |
|
3453 |
|
3454 % V1.7 parbox to format \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext |
|
3455 \long\def\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{0.915\textwidth}{#1}} |
|
3456 |
|
3457 |
|
3458 % formats the Title, authors names, affiliations and special paper notice |
|
3459 % THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING COMMAND! Do not allow blank lines or unintentional |
|
3460 % spaces to enter the definition - use % at the end of each line |
|
3461 \def\@maketitle{\newpage |
|
3462 \begin{center}% |
|
3463 \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technotes |
|
3464 {\bfseries\large\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@title\par}\vskip 1.3em{\lineskip .5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@author |
|
3465 \@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax |
|
3466 \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par |
|
3467 \hfill\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax |
|
3468 \else% not a technote |
|
3469 \vskip0.2em{\Huge\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\normalfont\normalsize\vskip 0\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip |
|
3470 \bfseries\Large}\@title\par}\vskip 1.0em\par% |
|
3471 % V1.6 handle \author differently if in conference mode |
|
3472 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% |
|
3473 {\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace% |
|
3474 \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par}\relax |
|
3475 \else% peerreviewca, peerreview or journal |
|
3476 \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca |
|
3477 % peerreviewca handles author names just like conference mode |
|
3478 {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace% |
|
3479 \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par |
|
3480 {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax |
|
3481 \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par\hfill |
|
3482 \@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax |
|
3483 \else% journal or peerreview |
|
3484 {\lineskip.5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@author\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par |
|
3485 {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax |
|
3486 \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par\hfill |
|
3487 \@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax |
|
3488 \fi |
|
3489 \fi |
|
3490 \fi\end{center}} |
|
3491 |
|
3492 |
|
3493 |
|
3494 % V1.7 Computer Society "diamond line" which follows index terms for nonconference papers |
|
3495 \def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\hspace{7.5pt}% |
|
3496 \raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}% |
|
3497 \hspace{7.5pt}\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\relax} |
|
3498 |
|
3499 % V1.7 standard LateX2e \thanks, but with \itshape under compsoc. Also make it a \long\def |
|
3500 % We also need to trigger the one-shot footnote rule |
|
3501 \def\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule{\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoteruletrue} |
|
3502 |
|
3503 |
|
3504 \long\def\thanks#1{\footnotemark |
|
3505 \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks |
|
3506 \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\itshape |
|
3507 \protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule\relax}\ignorespaces#1}}} |
|
3508 \let\@thanks\@empty |
|
3509 |
|
3510 % V1.7 allow \author to contain \par's. This is needed to allow \thanks to contain \par. |
|
3511 \long\def\author#1{\gdef\@author{#1}} |
|
3512 |
|
3513 |
|
3514 % in addition to setting up IEEEitemize, we need to remove a baselineskip space above and |
|
3515 % below it because \list's \pars introduce blank lines because of the footnote struts. |
|
3516 \def\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist{\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$}% |
|
3517 \setlength{\IEEElabelindent}{0pt}\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}% |
|
3518 \setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}\setlength{\topsep}{0.5\baselineskip}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\relax} |
|
3519 |
|
3520 |
|
3521 % flag for fake non-compsoc \IEEEcompsocthanksitem - prevents line break on very first item |
|
3522 \newif\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem \@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse |
|
3523 |
|
3524 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
|
3525 % V1.7 compsoc bullet item \thanks |
|
3526 % also, we need to redefine this to destroy the argument in \@IEEEdynamictitlevspace |
|
3527 \long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\relax\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse\footnotemark |
|
3528 \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks |
|
3529 \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\itshape\protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule |
|
3530 {\let\IEEEiedlistdecl\relax\protect\begin{IEEEitemize}[\protect\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist]\ignorespaces#1\relax |
|
3531 \protect\end{IEEEitemize}}\protect\vspace{-1\baselineskip}}}} |
|
3532 \DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\item} |
|
3533 \else |
|
3534 % non-compsoc, allow for dual compilation via rerouting to normal \thanks |
|
3535 \long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\thanks{#1}} |
|
3536 % redirect to "pseudo-par" \hfil\break\indent after swallowing [] from \IEEEcompsocthanksitem[] |
|
3537 \DeclareRobustCommand{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg}% |
|
3538 {\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[\relax]}} |
|
3539 % be sure and break only after first item, be sure and ignore spaces after optional argument |
|
3540 \def\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[#1]{\relax\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem\hfil\break |
|
3541 \indent\fi\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemtrue\ignorespaces} |
|
3542 \fi |
|
3543 |
|
3544 |
|
3545 % V1.6b define the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle as needed |
|
3546 \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview |
|
3547 \def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\@IEEEcleardoublepage{empty}% |
|
3548 \ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn |
|
3549 \twocolumn[\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace] |
|
3550 \else |
|
3551 \newpage\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip |
|
3552 \fi |
|
3553 \thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}} |
|
3554 \else |
|
3555 % \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle does nothing if peer review option has not been selected |
|
3556 \def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\relax} |
|
3557 \fi |
|
3558 |
|
3559 % peerreview formats the repeated title like the title in journal papers. |
|
3560 \def\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\begin{center}\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}% |
|
3561 \normalfont\normalsize\vskip0.2em{\Huge\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par |
|
3562 \end{center}} |
|
3563 |
|
3564 |
|
3565 |
|
3566 % V1.6 |
|
3567 % this is a static rubber spacer between the title/authors and the main text |
|
3568 % used for single column text, or when the title appears in the first column |
|
3569 % of two column text (technotes). |
|
3570 \def\@IEEEstatictitlevskip{{\normalfont\normalsize |
|
3571 % adjust spacing to next text |
|
3572 % v1.6b handle peer review papers |
|
3573 \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview |
|
3574 % for peer review papers, the same value is used for both title pages |
|
3575 % regardless of the other paper modes |
|
3576 \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip |
|
3577 \else |
|
3578 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% conference |
|
3579 \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip% |
|
3580 \else% |
|
3581 \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technote |
|
3582 \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip% |
|
3583 \else% journal uses more space |
|
3584 \vskip 2.5\baselineskip plus 0.75\baselineskip minus 0.375\baselineskip% |
|
3585 \fi |
|
3586 \fi |
|
3587 \fi}} |
|
3588 |
|
3589 |
|
3590 % V1.6 |
|
3591 % This is a dynamically determined rigid spacer between the title/authors |
|
3592 % and the main text. This is used only for single column titles over two |
|
3593 % column text (most common) |
|
3594 % This is bit tricky because we have to ensure that the textheight of the |
|
3595 % main text is an integer multiple of \baselineskip |
|
3596 % otherwise underfull vbox problems may develop in the second column of the |
|
3597 % text on the titlepage |
|
3598 % The possible use of \IEEEpubid must also be taken into account. |
|
3599 \def\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace{{% |
|
3600 % we run within a group so that all the macros can be forgotten when we are done |
|
3601 \long\def\thanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \thanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height |
|
3602 \long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \IEEEcompsocitemizethanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height |
|
3603 \normalfont\normalsize% we declare more descriptive variable names |
|
3604 \let\@IEEEmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%height of the main text columns |
|
3605 \let\@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%height of the main text columns with integer # lines |
|
3606 % set the nominal and minimum values for the title spacer |
|
3607 % the dynamic algorithm will not allow the spacer size to |
|
3608 % become less than \@IEEEMINtitlevspace - instead it will be |
|
3609 % lengthened |
|
3610 % default to journal values |
|
3611 \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{2.5\baselineskip}% |
|
3612 \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{2\baselineskip}% |
|
3613 % conferences and technotes need tighter spacing |
|
3614 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference%conference |
|
3615 \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}% |
|
3616 \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}% |
|
3617 \fi |
|
3618 \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%technote |
|
3619 \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}% |
|
3620 \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}% |
|
3621 \fi% |
|
3622 % get the height that the title will take up |
|
3623 \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview |
|
3624 \settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle}}% |
|
3625 \else |
|
3626 \settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@maketitle}}% |
|
3627 \fi |
|
3628 \@IEEEmaintextheight=-\@IEEEmaintextheight% title takes away from maintext, so reverse sign |
|
3629 % add the height of the page textheight |
|
3630 \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by \textheight% |
|
3631 % correct for title pages using pubid |
|
3632 \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else |
|
3633 % peerreview papers use the pubid on the cover page only. |
|
3634 % And the cover page uses a static spacer. |
|
3635 \if@IEEEusingpubid\advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEpubidpullup\fi |
|
3636 \fi% |
|
3637 % subtract off the nominal value of the title bottom spacer |
|
3638 \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEENORMtitlevspace% |
|
3639 % \topskip takes away some too |
|
3640 \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\topskip% |
|
3641 % calculate the column height of the main text for lines |
|
3642 % now we calculate the main text height as if holding |
|
3643 % an integer number of \normalsize lines after the first |
|
3644 % and discard any excess fractional remainder |
|
3645 % we subtracted the first line, because the first line |
|
3646 % is placed \topskip into the maintext, not \baselineskip like the |
|
3647 % rest of the lines. |
|
3648 \@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEmaintextheight% |
|
3649 \divide\@IEEEINTmaintextheight by \baselineskip% |
|
3650 \multiply\@IEEEINTmaintextheight by \baselineskip% |
|
3651 % now we calculate how much the title spacer height will |
|
3652 % have to be reduced from nominal (\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight is always |
|
3653 % a positive value) so that the maintext area will contain an integer |
|
3654 % number of normal size lines |
|
3655 % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer |
|
3656 % need \@IEEEINTmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register |
|
3657 \let\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight=\@IEEEINTmaintextheight% |
|
3658 \advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEmaintextheight% |
|
3659 \advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by \baselineskip% |
|
3660 % this is the calculated height of the spacer |
|
3661 % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer |
|
3662 % need \@IEEEmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register |
|
3663 \let\@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEEmaintextheight% |
|
3664 \@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEENORMtitlevspace% set the nominal value |
|
3665 % we go with the reduced length if it is smaller than an increase |
|
3666 \ifdim\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight < 0.5\baselineskip\relax% |
|
3667 \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight% |
|
3668 % if the resulting spacer is too small back out and go with an increase instead |
|
3669 \ifdim\@IEEECOMPENSATElen<\@IEEEMINtitlevspace\relax% |
|
3670 \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip% |
|
3671 \fi% |
|
3672 \else% |
|
3673 % go with an increase because it is closer to the nominal than a decrease |
|
3674 \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight% |
|
3675 \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip% |
|
3676 \fi% |
|
3677 % set the calculated rigid spacer |
|
3678 \vspace{\@IEEECOMPENSATElen}}} |
|
3679 |
|
3680 |
|
3681 |
|
3682 % V1.6 |
|
3683 % we allow the user access to the last part of the title area |
|
3684 % useful in emergencies such as when a different spacing is needed |
|
3685 % This text is NOT compensated for in the dynamic sizer. |
|
3686 \let\@IEEEaftertitletext=\relax |
|
3687 \long\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\def\@IEEEaftertitletext{#1}} |
|
3688 |
|
3689 % V1.7 provide a way for users to enter abstract and keywords |
|
3690 % into the onecolumn title are. This text is compensated for |
|
3691 % in the dynamic sizer. |
|
3692 \let\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext=\relax |
|
3693 \long\def\IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext#1{\def\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext{#1}} |
|
3694 % V1.7 provide a way for users to get the \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext if |
|
3695 % not in compsoc journal mode - this way abstract and keywords can be placed |
|
3696 % in their conventional position if not in compsoc mode. |
|
3697 \def\IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext{% |
|
3698 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc% display if compsoc conf |
|
3699 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext\fi |
|
3700 \else% or if not compsoc |
|
3701 \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext\fi} |
|
3702 |
|
3703 |
|
3704 % command to allow alteration of baselinestretch, but only if the current |
|
3705 % baselineskip is unity. Used to tweak the compsoc abstract and keywords line spacing. |
|
3706 \def\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch#1{{\def\baselinestretch{1}\selectfont |
|
3707 \global\@tempskipa\baselineskip}\ifnum\@tempskipa=\baselineskip% |
|
3708 \def\baselinestretch{#1}\selectfont\fi\relax} |
|
3709 |
|
3710 |
|
3711 % abstract and keywords are in \small, except |
|
3712 % for 9pt docs in which they are in \footnotesize |
|
3713 % Because 9pt docs use an 8pt footnotesize, \small |
|
3714 % becomes a rather awkward 8.5pt |
|
3715 \def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\small} |
|
3716 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine |
|
3717 \def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize} |
|
3718 \fi |
|
3719 |
|
3720 % compsoc journals use \footnotesize, compsoc conferences use normalsize |
|
3721 \@IEEEcompsoconly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}} |
|
3722 %\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\normalsize}} |
|
3723 |
|
3724 |
|
3725 |
|
3726 |
|
3727 % V1.6 have abstract and keywords strip leading spaces, pars and newlines |
|
3728 % so that spacing is more tightly controlled. |
|
3729 \def\abstract{\normalfont |
|
3730 \if@twocolumn |
|
3731 \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{\abstractname}---\relax |
|
3732 \else |
|
3733 \begin{center}\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize |
|
3734 \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} |
|
3735 % V1.6 IEEE wants only 1 pica from end of abstract to introduction heading when in |
|
3736 % conference mode (the heading already has this much above it) |
|
3737 \def\endabstract{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\vspace{1.34ex}\else\vspace{1.34ex}\fi\par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi |
|
3738 \normalfont\normalsize} |
|
3739 |
|
3740 \def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont |
|
3741 \if@twocolumn |
|
3742 \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}-\relax |
|
3743 \else |
|
3744 \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize |
|
3745 \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} |
|
3746 \def\endIEEEkeywords{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\vspace{1.34ex}\else\vspace{0.67ex}\fi |
|
3747 \par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi% |
|
3748 \normalfont\normalsize} |
|
3749 |
|
3750 % V1.7 compsoc keywords index terms |
|
3751 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
|
3752 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference |
|
3753 \def\abstract{\normalfont |
|
3754 \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\abstractname}\end{center}\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip |
|
3755 \if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize% |
|
3756 \par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} |
|
3757 \def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\vskip 1.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip |
|
3758 \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip |
|
3759 \if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize% |
|
3760 \par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} |
|
3761 \else% compsoc not conference |
|
3762 \def\abstract{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily |
|
3763 \if@twocolumn |
|
3764 \@IEEEabskeysecsize\noindent\textbf{\abstractname}---\relax |
|
3765 \else |
|
3766 \begin{center}\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize% |
|
3767 \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} |
|
3768 \def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily |
|
3769 \if@twocolumn |
|
3770 \@IEEEabskeysecsize\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip\noindent |
|
3771 \textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax |
|
3772 \else |
|
3773 \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize% |
|
3774 \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} |
|
3775 \fi |
|
3776 \fi |
|
3777 |
|
3778 |
|
3779 |
|
3780 % gobbles all leading \, \\ and \par, upon finding first token that |
|
3781 % is not a \ , \\ or a \par, it ceases and returns that token |
|
3782 % |
|
3783 % used to strip leading \, \\ and \par from the input |
|
3784 % so that such things in the beginning of an environment will not |
|
3785 % affect the formatting of the text |
|
3786 \long\def\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP#1{\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=0% |
|
3787 \let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken#1% |
|
3788 \let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken=\par% |
|
3789 \let\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken=\\% |
|
3790 \let\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken=\ % |
|
3791 \def\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO{\ }% |
|
3792 \ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken% |
|
3793 \let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% |
|
3794 \fi% |
|
3795 \ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken% |
|
3796 \let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% |
|
3797 \fi% |
|
3798 \ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken% |
|
3799 \let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% |
|
3800 \fi% |
|
3801 % a control space will come in as a macro |
|
3802 % when it is the last one on a line |
|
3803 \ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO% |
|
3804 \let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% |
|
3805 \fi% |
|
3806 % if we have to swallow this token, do so and taste the next one |
|
3807 % else spit it out and stop gobbling |
|
3808 \ifx\@IEEEswallowthistoken 1\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP\else% |
|
3809 \let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=#1\fi% |
|
3810 \@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP}% |
|
3811 |
|
3812 |
|
3813 |
|
3814 |
|
3815 % TITLING OF SECTIONS |
|
3816 \def\@IEEEsectpunct{:\ \,} % Punctuation after run-in section heading (headings which are |
|
3817 % part of the paragraphs), need little bit more than a single space |
|
3818 % spacing from section number to title |
|
3819 % compsoc conferences use regular period/space punctuation |
|
3820 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
|
3821 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
|
3822 \def\@IEEEsectpunct{.\ } |
|
3823 \fi\fi |
|
3824 |
|
3825 |
|
3826 \def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 0.5em\relax} |
|
3827 |
|
3828 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
|
3829 % compsoc journals need extra spacing |
|
3830 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else |
|
3831 \def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 1em\relax} |
|
3832 \fi\fi |
|
3833 |
|
3834 %v1.7 put {} after #6 to allow for some types of user font control |
|
3835 %and use \@@par rather than \par |
|
3836 \def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{% |
|
3837 \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth |
|
3838 \let\@svsec\@empty |
|
3839 \else |
|
3840 \refstepcounter{#1}% |
|
3841 % load section label and spacer into \@svsec |
|
3842 \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}% |
|
3843 \fi% |
|
3844 \@tempskipa #5\relax |
|
3845 \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@% tempskipa determines whether is treated as a high |
|
3846 \begingroup #6{\relax% or low level heading |
|
3847 \noindent % subsections are NOT indented |
|
3848 % print top level headings. \@svsec is label, #8 is heading title |
|
3849 % IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal |
|
3850 {\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}{\interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}}% |
|
3851 \endgroup |
|
3852 \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else |
|
3853 \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}% |
|
3854 \else % printout low level headings |
|
3855 % svsechd seems to swallow the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{} |
|
3856 % got rid of sectionmark stuff |
|
3857 \def\@svsechd{#6{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec #8\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}% |
|
3858 \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else |
|
3859 \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}}% |
|
3860 \fi%skip down |
|
3861 \@xsect{#5}} |
|
3862 |
|
3863 |
|
3864 % section* handler |
|
3865 %v1.7 put {} after #4 to allow for some types of user font control |
|
3866 %and use \@@par rather than \par |
|
3867 \def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{\@tempskipa #3\relax |
|
3868 \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ |
|
3869 %\begingroup #4\@hangfrom{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\par}\endgroup |
|
3870 % IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal |
|
3871 \begingroup \noindent #4{\relax{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\@@par}}\endgroup |
|
3872 % svsechd swallows the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{} |
|
3873 \else \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax #5\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}}\fi |
|
3874 \@xsect{#3}} |
|
3875 |
|
3876 |
|
3877 %% SECTION heading spacing and font |
|
3878 %% |
|
3879 % arguments are: #1 - sectiontype name |
|
3880 % (for \@sect) #2 - section level |
|
3881 % #3 - section heading indent |
|
3882 % #4 - top separation (absolute value used, neg indicates not to indent main text) |
|
3883 % If negative, make stretch parts negative too! |
|
3884 % #5 - (absolute value used) positive: bottom separation after heading, |
|
3885 % negative: amount to indent main text after heading |
|
3886 % Both #4 and #5 negative means to indent main text and use negative top separation |
|
3887 % #6 - font control |
|
3888 % You've got to have \normalfont\normalsize in the font specs below to prevent |
|
3889 % trouble when you do something like: |
|
3890 % \section{Note}{\ttfamily TT-TEXT} is known to ... |
|
3891 % IEEE sometimes REALLY stretches the area before a section |
|
3892 % heading by up to about 0.5in. However, it may not be a good |
|
3893 % idea to let LaTeX have quite this much rubber. |
|
3894 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% |
|
3895 % IEEE wants section heading spacing to decrease for conference mode |
|
3896 \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}% |
|
3897 {0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}% |
|
3898 \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}% |
|
3899 {0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% |
|
3900 \else % for journals |
|
3901 \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{3.0ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}% V1.6 3.0ex from 3.5ex |
|
3902 {0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}% |
|
3903 \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{3.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}% |
|
3904 {0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% |
|
3905 \fi |
|
3906 |
|
3907 % for both journals and conferences |
|
3908 % decided to put in a little rubber above the section, might help somebody |
|
3909 \def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}% |
|
3910 {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% |
|
3911 \def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}% |
|
3912 {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% |
|
3913 |
|
3914 |
|
3915 % compsoc |
|
3916 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
|
3917 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
|
3918 % compsoc conference |
|
3919 \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}% |
|
3920 {1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\large\bfseries}}% |
|
3921 \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}% |
|
3922 {1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\sublargesize\bfseries}}% |
|
3923 \def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}% |
|
3924 {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}% |
|
3925 \def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}% |
|
3926 {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}% |
|
3927 \else% compsoc journals |
|
3928 % use negative top separation as compsoc journals do not indent paragraphs after section titles |
|
3929 \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-3ex plus -2ex minus -1.5ex}% |
|
3930 {0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\large\sffamily\bfseries\scshape}}% |
|
3931 % Note that subsection and smaller may not be correct for the Computer Society, |
|
3932 % I have to look up an example. |
|
3933 \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-3.5ex plus -1.5ex minus -1.5ex}% |
|
3934 {0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\bfseries}}% |
|
3935 \def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-2.5ex plus -1ex minus -1ex}% |
|
3936 {0.5ex plus 0.5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\itshape}}% |
|
3937 \def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{-0ex plus -0.1ex minus -0.1ex}% |
|
3938 {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}% |
|
3939 \fi\fi |
|
3940 |
|
3941 |
|
3942 |
|
3943 |
|
3944 %% ENVIRONMENTS |
|
3945 % "box" symbols at end of proofs |
|
3946 \def\IEEEQEDclosed{\mbox{\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{1.3ex}}} % for a filled box |
|
3947 % V1.6 some journals use an open box instead that will just fit around a closed one |
|
3948 \def\IEEEQEDopen{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.2pt}\fbox{\rule[0pt]{0pt}{1.3ex}\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{0pt}}}} |
|
3949 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
|
3950 \def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDopen} % default to open for compsoc |
|
3951 \else |
|
3952 \def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDclosed} % otherwise default to closed |
|
3953 \fi |
|
3954 |
|
3955 % v1.7 name change to avoid namespace collision with amsthm. Also add support |
|
3956 % for an optional argument. |
|
3957 \def\IEEEproof{\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEproof}{\@IEEEproof[\IEEEproofname]}} |
|
3958 \def\@IEEEproof[#1]{\par\noindent\hspace{2em}{\itshape #1: }} |
|
3959 \def\endIEEEproof{\hspace*{\fill}~\IEEEQED\par} |
|
3960 |
|
3961 |
|
3962 %\itemindent is set to \z@ by list, so define new temporary variable |
|
3963 \newdimen\@IEEEtmpitemindent |
|
3964 \def\@begintheorem#1#2{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep 0pt\rmfamily\trivlist% |
|
3965 \item[\hskip \labelsep{\indent\itshape #1\ #2:}]\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent} |
|
3966 \def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep 0pt\rmfamily \trivlist% |
|
3967 % V1.6 IEEE is back to using () around theorem names which are also in italics |
|
3968 % Thanks to Christian Peel for reporting this. |
|
3969 \item[\hskip\labelsep{\indent\itshape #1\ #2\ (#3):}]\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent} |
|
3970 % V1.7 remove bogus \unskip that caused equations in theorems to collide with |
|
3971 % lines below. |
|
3972 \def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist} |
|
3973 |
|
3974 % V1.6 |
|
3975 % display command for the section the theorem is in - so that \thesection |
|
3976 % is not used as this will be in Roman numerals when we want arabic. |
|
3977 % LaTeX2e uses \def\@thmcounter#1{\noexpand\arabic{#1}} for the theorem number |
|
3978 % (second part) display and \def\@thmcountersep{.} as a separator. |
|
3979 % V1.7 intercept calls to the section counter and reroute to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection |
|
3980 % to allow \appendix(ices} to override as needed. |
|
3981 % |
|
3982 % special handler for sections, allows appendix(ices) to override |
|
3983 \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection#1{\arabic{#1}} |
|
3984 % string macro |
|
3985 \edef\@IEEEstringsection{section} |
|
3986 |
|
3987 % redefine the #1#2[#3] form of newtheorem to use a hook to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection |
|
3988 % if section in_counter is used |
|
3989 \def\@xnthm#1#2[#3]{% |
|
3990 \expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname |
|
3991 {\@definecounter{#1}\@newctr{#1}[#3]% |
|
3992 \edef\@IEEEstringtmp{#3} |
|
3993 \ifx\@IEEEstringtmp\@IEEEstringsection |
|
3994 \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{% |
|
3995 \noexpand\@IEEEthmcounterinsection{#3}\@thmcountersep |
|
3996 \@thmcounter{#1}}% |
|
3997 \else |
|
3998 \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{% |
|
3999 \expandafter\noexpand\csname the#3\endcsname \@thmcountersep |
|
4000 \@thmcounter{#1}}% |
|
4001 \fi |
|
4002 \global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#1}{#2}}% |
|
4003 \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}} |
|
4004 |
|
4005 |
|
4006 |
|
4007 %% SET UP THE DEFAULT PAGESTYLE |
|
4008 \ps@headings |
|
4009 \pagenumbering{arabic} |
|
4010 |
|
4011 % normally the page counter starts at 1 |
|
4012 \setcounter{page}{1} |
|
4013 % however, for peerreview the cover sheet is page 0 or page -1 |
|
4014 % (for duplex printing) |
|
4015 \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview |
|
4016 \if@twoside |
|
4017 \setcounter{page}{-1} |
|
4018 \else |
|
4019 \setcounter{page}{0} |
|
4020 \fi |
|
4021 \fi |
|
4022 |
|
4023 % standard book class behavior - let bottom line float up and down as |
|
4024 % needed when single sided |
|
4025 \ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside\else\raggedbottom\fi |
|
4026 % if two column - turn on twocolumn, allow word spacings to stretch more and |
|
4027 % enforce a rigid position for the last lines |
|
4028 \ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn |
|
4029 % the peer review option delays invoking twocolumn |
|
4030 \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else |
|
4031 \twocolumn |
|
4032 \fi |
|
4033 \sloppy |
|
4034 \flushbottom |
|
4035 \fi |
|
4036 |
|
4037 |
|
4038 |
|
4039 |
|
4040 % \APPENDIX and \APPENDICES definitions |
|
4041 |
|
4042 % This is the \@ifmtarg command from the LaTeX ifmtarg package |
|
4043 % by Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau |
|
4044 % \@ifmtarg is used to determine if an argument to a command |
|
4045 % is present or not. |
|
4046 % For instance: |
|
4047 % \@ifmtarg{#1}{\typeout{empty}}{\typeout{has something}} |
|
4048 % \@ifmtarg is used with our redefined \section command if |
|
4049 % \appendices is invoked. |
|
4050 % The command \section will behave slightly differently depending |
|
4051 % on whether the user specifies a title: |
|
4052 % \section{My appendix title} |
|
4053 % or not: |
|
4054 % \section{} |
|
4055 % This way, we can eliminate the blank lines where the title |
|
4056 % would be, and the unneeded : after Appendix in the table of |
|
4057 % contents |
|
4058 \begingroup |
|
4059 \catcode`\Q=3 |
|
4060 \long\gdef\@ifmtarg#1{\@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil} |
|
4061 \long\gdef\@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4} |
|
4062 \endgroup |
|
4063 % end of \@ifmtarg defs |
|
4064 |
|
4065 |
|
4066 % V1.7 |
|
4067 % command that allows the one time saving of the original definition |
|
4068 % of section to \@IEEEappendixsavesection for \appendix or \appendices |
|
4069 % we don't save \section here as it may be redefined later by other |
|
4070 % packages (hyperref.sty, etc.) |
|
4071 \def\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce{\let\@IEEEappendixsavesection\section |
|
4072 \let\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\relax} |
|
4073 |
|
4074 % neat trick to grab and process the argument from \section{argument} |
|
4075 % we process differently if the user invoked \section{} with no |
|
4076 % argument (title) |
|
4077 % note we reroute the call to the old \section* |
|
4078 \def\@IEEEprocessthesectionargument#1{% |
|
4079 \@ifmtarg{#1}{% |
|
4080 \@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\thesectiondis}% |
|
4081 \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname~\thesection}}{% |
|
4082 \@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\thesectiondis \\* #1}% |
|
4083 \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname~\thesection: #1}}} |
|
4084 |
|
4085 % we use this if the user calls \section{} after |
|
4086 % \appendix-- which has no meaning. So, we ignore the |
|
4087 % command and its argument. Then, warn the user. |
|
4088 \def\@IEEEdestroythesectionargument#1{\typeout{** WARNING: Ignoring useless |
|
4089 \protect\section\space in Appendix (line \the\inputlineno).}} |
|
4090 |
|
4091 |
|
4092 % remember \thesection forms will be displayed in \ref calls |
|
4093 % and in the Table of Contents. |
|
4094 % The \sectiondis form is used in the actual heading itself |
|
4095 |
|
4096 % appendix command for one single appendix |
|
4097 % normally has no heading. However, if you want a |
|
4098 % heading, you can do so via the optional argument: |
|
4099 % \appendix[Optional Heading] |
|
4100 \def\appendix{\relax} |
|
4101 \renewcommand{\appendix}[1][]{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par |
|
4102 % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique |
|
4103 \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.A}% |
|
4104 % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section |
|
4105 \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}% |
|
4106 \setcounter{section}{0}% |
|
4107 \setcounter{subsection}{0}% |
|
4108 \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}% |
|
4109 \setcounter{paragraph}{0}% |
|
4110 \gdef\thesection{A}% |
|
4111 \gdef\thesectiondis{}% |
|
4112 \gdef\thesubsection{\Alph{subsection}}% |
|
4113 \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A} |
|
4114 \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter |
|
4115 \@ifmtarg{#1}{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname}% |
|
4116 \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname}}{% |
|
4117 \@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\\* #1}% |
|
4118 \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname: #1}}% |
|
4119 % redefine \section command for appendix |
|
4120 % leave \section* as is |
|
4121 \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% |
|
4122 \@IEEEdestroythesectionargument}}% throw out the argument |
|
4123 % of the normal form |
|
4124 } |
|
4125 |
|
4126 |
|
4127 |
|
4128 % appendices command for multiple appendices |
|
4129 % user then calls \section with an argument (possibly empty) to |
|
4130 % declare the individual appendices |
|
4131 \def\appendices{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par |
|
4132 % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique |
|
4133 \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.\Alph{section}}% |
|
4134 % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section |
|
4135 \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}% |
|
4136 \setcounter{section}{-1}% we want \refstepcounter to use section 0 |
|
4137 \setcounter{subsection}{0}% |
|
4138 \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}% |
|
4139 \setcounter{paragraph}{0}% |
|
4140 \ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices% |
|
4141 \gdef\thesection{\Roman{section}}% |
|
4142 \gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}}% |
|
4143 \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}.}}% |
|
4144 \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A\arabic{##1}} |
|
4145 \else% |
|
4146 \gdef\thesection{\Alph{section}}% |
|
4147 \gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}}% |
|
4148 \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}.}}% |
|
4149 \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{\Alph{##1}} |
|
4150 \fi% |
|
4151 \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter |
|
4152 \setcounter{section}{0}% NEXT \section will be the FIRST appendix |
|
4153 % redefine \section command for appendices |
|
4154 % leave \section* as is |
|
4155 \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% process the *-form |
|
4156 \refstepcounter{section}% or is a new section so, |
|
4157 \@IEEEprocessthesectionargument}}% process the argument |
|
4158 % of the normal form |
|
4159 } |
|
4160 |
|
4161 |
|
4162 |
|
4163 % \IEEEPARstart |
|
4164 % Definition for the big two line drop cap letter at the beginning of the |
|
4165 % first paragraph of journal papers. The first argument is the first letter |
|
4166 % of the first word, the second argument is the remaining letters of the |
|
4167 % first word which will be rendered in upper case. |
|
4168 % In V1.6 this has been completely rewritten to: |
|
4169 % |
|
4170 % 1. no longer have problems when the user begins an environment |
|
4171 % within the paragraph that uses \IEEEPARstart. |
|
4172 % 2. auto-detect and use the current font family |
|
4173 % 3. revise handling of the space at the end of the first word so that |
|
4174 % interword glue will now work as normal. |
|
4175 % 4. produce correctly aligned edges for the (two) indented lines. |
|
4176 % |
|
4177 % We generalize things via control macros - playing with these is fun too. |
|
4178 % |
|
4179 % V1.7 added more control macros to make it easy for IEEEtrantools.sty users |
|
4180 % to change the font style. |
|
4181 % |
|
4182 % the number of lines that are indented to clear it |
|
4183 % may need to increase if using decenders |
|
4184 \def\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES{2} |
|
4185 % minimum number of lines left on a page to allow a \@IEEEPARstart |
|
4186 % Does not take into consideration rubber shrink, so it tends to |
|
4187 % be overly cautious |
|
4188 \def\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES{2} |
|
4189 % V1.7 the height of the drop cap is adjusted to match the height of this text |
|
4190 % in the current font (when \IEEEPARstart is called). |
|
4191 \def\@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT{T} |
|
4192 % the depth the letter is lowered below the baseline |
|
4193 % the height (and size) of the letter is determined by the sum |
|
4194 % of this value and the height of the \@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current |
|
4195 % font. It is a good idea to set this value in terms of the baselineskip |
|
4196 % so that it can respond to changes therein. |
|
4197 \def\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH{1.1\baselineskip} |
|
4198 % V1.7 the font the drop cap will be rendered in, |
|
4199 % can take zero or one argument. |
|
4200 \def\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\bfseries} |
|
4201 % V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify |
|
4202 % the drop cap letter, can take zero or one argument. |
|
4203 \def\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{\MakeUppercase} |
|
4204 % V1.7 the font that will be used to render the rest of the word, |
|
4205 % can take zero or one argument. |
|
4206 \def\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\relax} |
|
4207 % V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify |
|
4208 % the rest of the word, can take zero or one argument. |
|
4209 \def\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\MakeUppercase} |
|
4210 % This is the horizontal separation distance from the drop letter to the main text. |
|
4211 % Lengths that depend on the font (e.g., ex, em, etc.) will be referenced |
|
4212 % to the font that is active when \IEEEPARstart is called. |
|
4213 \def\@IEEEPARstartSEP{0.15em} |
|
4214 % V1.7 horizontal offset applied to the left of the drop cap. |
|
4215 \def\@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET{0em} |
|
4216 % V1.7 Italic correction command applied at the end of the drop cap. |
|
4217 \def\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT{\/} |
|
4218 |
|
4219 % V1.7 compoc uses nonbold drop cap and small caps word style |
|
4220 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
|
4221 \def\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\mdseries} |
|
4222 \def\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\scshape} |
|
4223 \def\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\relax} |
|
4224 \fi |
|
4225 |
|
4226 % definition of \IEEEPARstart |
|
4227 % THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING AREA, DO NOT ALLOW SPACES WITHIN THESE LINES |
|
4228 % |
|
4229 % The token \@IEEEPARstartfont will be globally defined after the first use |
|
4230 % of \IEEEPARstart and will be a font command which creates the big letter |
|
4231 % The first argument is the first letter of the first word and the second |
|
4232 % argument is the rest of the first word(s). |
|
4233 \def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{\par{% |
|
4234 % if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start |
|
4235 % on a new one |
|
4236 \@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES\baselineskip}{\relax}% |
|
4237 % V1.7 move this up here in case user uses \textbf for \@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE |
|
4238 % which uses command \leavevmode which causes an unwanted \indent to be issued |
|
4239 \noindent |
|
4240 % calculate the desired height of the big letter |
|
4241 % it extends from the top of \@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current font |
|
4242 % down to \@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH below the current baseline |
|
4243 \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT}% |
|
4244 \addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}% |
|
4245 % extract the name of the current font in bold |
|
4246 % and place it in \@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME |
|
4247 \def\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD##1 ##2\relax{##1}% |
|
4248 {\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\selectfont\edef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE{\fontname\font\space}% |
|
4249 \xdef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME{\expandafter\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE\relax}}}% |
|
4250 % define a font based on this name with a point size equal to the desired |
|
4251 % height of the drop letter |
|
4252 \font\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax% |
|
4253 % save this value as a counter (integer) value (sp points) |
|
4254 \@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% |
|
4255 % now get the height of the actual letter produced by this font size |
|
4256 \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1}}% |
|
4257 % If something bogus happens like the first argument is empty or the |
|
4258 % current font is strange, do not allow a zero height. |
|
4259 \ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0pt\relax% |
|
4260 \typeout{** WARNING: IEEEPARstart drop letter has zero height! (line \the\inputlineno)}% |
|
4261 \typeout{ Forcing the drop letter font size to 10pt.}% |
|
4262 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=10pt% |
|
4263 \fi% |
|
4264 % and store it as a counter |
|
4265 \@IEEEtrantmpcountB=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% |
|
4266 % Since a font size doesn't exactly correspond to the height of the capital |
|
4267 % letters in that font, the actual height of the letter, \@IEEEtrantmpcountB, |
|
4268 % will be less than that desired, \@IEEEtrantmpcountA |
|
4269 % we need to raise the font size, \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA |
|
4270 % by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA / \@IEEEtrantmpcountB |
|
4271 % But, TeX doesn't have floating point division, so we have to use integer |
|
4272 % division. Hence the use of the counters. |
|
4273 % We need to reduce the denominator so that the loss of the remainder will |
|
4274 % have minimal affect on the accuracy of the result |
|
4275 \divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by 200% |
|
4276 \divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountB% |
|
4277 % Then reequalize things when we use TeX's ability to multiply by |
|
4278 % floating point values |
|
4279 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0.005\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% |
|
4280 \multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA% |
|
4281 % \@IEEEPARstartfont is globaly set to the calculated font of the big letter |
|
4282 % We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to to create the |
|
4283 % big letter. |
|
4284 \global\font\@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% |
|
4285 % Now set \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA to the width of the big letter |
|
4286 % We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to set the |
|
4287 % hanging indent |
|
4288 \settowidth{\global\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartfont |
|
4289 \@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}}}% |
|
4290 % end of the isolated calculation environment |
|
4291 % add in the extra clearance we want |
|
4292 \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEPARstartSEP\relax% |
|
4293 % add in the optional offset |
|
4294 \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET\relax% |
|
4295 % V1.7 don't allow negative offsets to produce negative hanging indents |
|
4296 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA |
|
4297 \ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB < 0 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 0pt\fi |
|
4298 % \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA has the width of the big letter plus the |
|
4299 % separation space and \@IEEEPARstartfont is the font we need to use |
|
4300 % Now, we make the letter and issue the hanging indent command |
|
4301 % The letter is placed in a box of zero width and height so that other |
|
4302 % text won't be displaced by it. |
|
4303 \hangindent\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\hangafter=-\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES% |
|
4304 \makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}% |
|
4305 \raisebox{-\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}[0pt][0pt]{\hspace{\@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET}% |
|
4306 \@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}% |
|
4307 \hspace{\@IEEEPARstartSEP}}}% |
|
4308 {\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\selectfont#2}}}} |
|
4309 |
|
4310 |
|
4311 |
|
4312 |
|
4313 |
|
4314 |
|
4315 % determines if the space remaining on a given page is equal to or greater |
|
4316 % than the specified space of argument one |
|
4317 % if not, execute argument two (only if the remaining space is greater than zero) |
|
4318 % and issue a \newpage |
|
4319 % |
|
4320 % example: \@IEEEtranneedspace{2in}{\vfill} |
|
4321 % |
|
4322 % Does not take into consideration rubber shrinkage, so it tends to |
|
4323 % be overly cautious |
|
4324 % Based on an example posted by Donald Arseneau |
|
4325 % Note this macro uses \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB internally for calculations, |
|
4326 % so DO NOT PASS \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB to this routine |
|
4327 % if you need a dimen register, import with \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA instead |
|
4328 \def\@IEEEtranneedspace#1#2{\penalty-100\begingroup%shield temp variable |
|
4329 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\pagegoal\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB-\pagetotal% space left |
|
4330 \ifdim #1>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax% not enough space left |
|
4331 \ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\z@\relax #2\fi% |
|
4332 \newpage% |
|
4333 \fi\endgroup} |
|
4334 |
|
4335 |
|
4336 |
|
4337 % IEEEbiography ENVIRONMENT |
|
4338 % Allows user to enter biography leaving place for picture (adapts to font size) |
|
4339 % As of V1.5, a new optional argument allows you to have a real graphic! |
|
4340 % V1.5 and later also fixes the "colliding biographies" which could happen when a |
|
4341 % biography's text was shorter than the space for the photo. |
|
4342 % MDS 7/2001 |
|
4343 % V1.6 prevent multiple biographies from making multiple TOC entries |
|
4344 \newif\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade |
|
4345 \global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadetrue |
|
4346 |
|
4347 % biography counter so hyperref can jump directly to the biographies |
|
4348 % and not just the previous section |
|
4349 \newcounter{IEEEbiography} |
|
4350 \setcounter{IEEEbiography}{0} |
|
4351 |
|
4352 % photo area size |
|
4353 \def\@IEEEBIOphotowidth{1.0in} % width of the biography photo area |
|
4354 \def\@IEEEBIOphotodepth{1.25in} % depth (height) of the biography photo area |
|
4355 % area cleared for photo |
|
4356 \def\@IEEEBIOhangwidth{1.14in} % width cleared for the biography photo area |
|
4357 \def\@IEEEBIOhangdepth{1.25in} % depth cleared for the biography photo area |
|
4358 % actual depth will be a multiple of |
|
4359 % \baselineskip, rounded up |
|
4360 \def\@IEEEBIOskipN{4\baselineskip}% nominal value of the vskip above the biography |
|
4361 |
|
4362 \newenvironment{IEEEbiography}[2][]{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize% |
|
4363 \unitlength 1in\parskip=0pt\par\parindent 1em\interlinepenalty500% |
|
4364 % we need enough space to support the hanging indent |
|
4365 % the nominal value of the spacer |
|
4366 % and one extra line for good measure |
|
4367 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth% |
|
4368 \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEBIOskipN% |
|
4369 \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by 1\baselineskip% |
|
4370 % if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start |
|
4371 % with a new one |
|
4372 \@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\relax}% |
|
4373 % nominal spacer can strech, not shrink use 1fil so user can out stretch with \vfill |
|
4374 \vskip \@IEEEBIOskipN plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip% |
|
4375 % the default box for where the photo goes |
|
4376 \def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox{% |
|
4377 \begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}\centering PLACE\\ PHOTO\\ HERE \end{minipage}}}}% |
|
4378 % |
|
4379 % detect if the optional argument was supplied, this requires the |
|
4380 % \@ifmtarg command as defined in the appendix section above |
|
4381 % and if so, override the default box with what they want |
|
4382 \@ifmtarg{#1}{\relax}{\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{\mbox{\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}% |
|
4383 \centering% |
|
4384 #1% |
|
4385 \end{minipage}}}}% end if optional argument supplied |
|
4386 % Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before |
|
4387 \if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade% |
|
4388 % link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump |
|
4389 % to the biography, not the previous section |
|
4390 \setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}% |
|
4391 \refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% |
|
4392 \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}% |
|
4393 \global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse% |
|
4394 \fi% |
|
4395 % one more biography |
|
4396 \refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% |
|
4397 % Make an entry for this name into the table of contents |
|
4398 \addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#2}% |
|
4399 % V1.6 properly handle if a new paragraph should occur while the |
|
4400 % hanging indent is still active. Do this by redefining \par so |
|
4401 % that it will not start a new paragraph. (But it will appear to the |
|
4402 % user as if it did.) Also, strip any leading pars, newlines, or spaces. |
|
4403 \let\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD=\par% save the original \par command |
|
4404 \edef\par{\hfil\break\indent}% the new \par will not be a "real" \par |
|
4405 \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}% get height of biography box |
|
4406 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth% |
|
4407 \@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% countA has the hang depth |
|
4408 \divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \baselineskip% calculates lines needed to produce the hang depth |
|
4409 \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by 1% ensure we overestimate |
|
4410 % set the hanging indent |
|
4411 \hangindent\@IEEEBIOhangwidth% |
|
4412 \hangafter-\@IEEEtrantmpcountA% |
|
4413 % reference the top of the photo area to the top of a capital T |
|
4414 \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\mbox{T}}% |
|
4415 % set the photo box, give it zero width and height so as not to disturb anything |
|
4416 \noindent\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEBIOhangwidth}\raisebox{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}[0pt][0pt]{% |
|
4417 \raisebox{-\@IEEEBIOphotodepth}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}}}% |
|
4418 % now place the author name and begin the bio text |
|
4419 \noindent\textbf{#2\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\let\par=\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD\par% |
|
4420 % 7/2001 V1.5 detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo area |
|
4421 % and pad the unused area - preventing a collision from the next biography entry |
|
4422 % MDS |
|
4423 \ifnum \prevgraf <\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax% detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo |
|
4424 \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -\prevgraf% calculate how many lines we need to pad |
|
4425 \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% we compensate for the fact that we indented an extra line |
|
4426 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselineskip% calculate the length of the padding |
|
4427 \multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA% |
|
4428 \noindent\rule{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}% insert an invisible support strut |
|
4429 \fi% |
|
4430 \par\normalfont} |
|
4431 |
|
4432 |
|
4433 |
|
4434 % V1.6 |
|
4435 % added biography without a photo environment |
|
4436 \newenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{% |
|
4437 % Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before |
|
4438 \if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade% |
|
4439 % link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump |
|
4440 % to the biography, not the previous section |
|
4441 \setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}% |
|
4442 \refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% |
|
4443 \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}% |
|
4444 \global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse% |
|
4445 \fi% |
|
4446 % one more biography |
|
4447 \refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% |
|
4448 % Make an entry for this name into the table of contents |
|
4449 \addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#1}% |
|
4450 \normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize\interlinepenalty500% |
|
4451 \vskip 4\baselineskip plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip% |
|
4452 \parskip=0pt\par% |
|
4453 \noindent\textbf{#1\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\par\normalfont} |
|
4454 |
|
4455 |
|
4456 % provide the user with some old font commands |
|
4457 % got this from article.cls |
|
4458 \DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm} |
|
4459 \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf} |
|
4460 \DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt} |
|
4461 \DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf} |
|
4462 \DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit} |
|
4463 \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl} |
|
4464 \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc} |
|
4465 \DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal} |
|
4466 \DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal} |
|
4467 |
|
4468 |
|
4469 % SPECIAL PAPER NOTICE COMMANDS |
|
4470 % |
|
4471 % holds the special notice text |
|
4472 \def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{\relax} |
|
4473 |
|
4474 % for special papers, like invited papers, the user can do: |
|
4475 % \IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} before \maketitle |
|
4476 \def\IEEEspecialpapernotice#1{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% |
|
4477 \def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\sublargesize\textit{#1}\vspace*{1em}}}% |
|
4478 \else% |
|
4479 \def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\\*[1.5ex]\sublargesize\textit{#1}}\vspace*{-2ex}}% |
|
4480 \fi} |
|
4481 |
|
4482 |
|
4483 |
|
4484 |
|
4485 % PUBLISHER ID COMMANDS |
|
4486 % to insert a publisher's ID footer |
|
4487 % V1.6 \IEEEpubid has been changed so that the change in page size and style |
|
4488 % occurs in \maketitle. \IEEEpubid must now be issued prior to \maketitle |
|
4489 % use \IEEEpubidadjcol as before - in the second column of the title page |
|
4490 % These changes allow \maketitle to take the reduced page height into |
|
4491 % consideration when dynamically setting the space between the author |
|
4492 % names and the maintext. |
|
4493 % |
|
4494 % the amount the main text is pulled up to make room for the |
|
4495 % publisher's ID footer |
|
4496 % IEEE uses about 1.3\baselineskip for journals, |
|
4497 % dynamic title spacing will clean up the fraction |
|
4498 \def\@IEEEpubidpullup{1.3\baselineskip} |
|
4499 \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote |
|
4500 % for technotes it must be an integer of baselineskip as there can be no |
|
4501 % dynamic title spacing for two column mode technotes (the title is in the |
|
4502 % in first column) and we should maintain an integer number of lines in the |
|
4503 % second column |
|
4504 % There are some examples (such as older issues of "Transactions on |
|
4505 % Information Theory") in which IEEE really pulls the text off the ID for |
|
4506 % technotes - about 0.55in (or 4\baselineskip). We'll use 2\baselineskip |
|
4507 % and call it even. |
|
4508 \def\@IEEEpubidpullup{2\baselineskip} |
|
4509 \fi |
|
4510 |
|
4511 % V1.7 compsoc does not use a pullup |
|
4512 \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
|
4513 \def\@IEEEpubidpullup{0pt} |
|
4514 \fi |
|
4515 |
|
4516 % holds the ID text |
|
4517 \def\@IEEEpubid{\relax} |
|
4518 |
|
4519 % flag so \maketitle can tell if \IEEEpubid was called |
|
4520 \newif\if@IEEEusingpubid |
|
4521 \global\@IEEEusingpubidfalse |
|
4522 % issue this command in the page to have the ID at the bottom |
|
4523 % V1.6 use before \maketitle |
|
4524 \def\IEEEpubid#1{\def\@IEEEpubid{#1}\global\@IEEEusingpubidtrue} |
|
4525 |
|
4526 |
|
4527 % command which will pull up (shorten) the column it is executed in |
|
4528 % to make room for the publisher ID. Place in the second column of |
|
4529 % the title page when using \IEEEpubid |
|
4530 % Is smart enough not to do anything when in single column text or |
|
4531 % if the user hasn't called \IEEEpubid |
|
4532 % currently needed in for the second column of a page with the |
|
4533 % publisher ID. If not needed in future releases, please provide this |
|
4534 % command and define it as \relax for backward compatibility |
|
4535 % v1.6b do not allow command to operate if the peer review option has been |
|
4536 % selected because \IEEEpubidadjcol will not be on the cover page. |
|
4537 % V1.7 do nothing if compsoc |
|
4538 \def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else |
|
4539 \if@twocolumn\if@IEEEusingpubid\enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}\fi\fi\fi\fi} |
|
4540 |
|
4541 % Special thanks to Peter Wilson, Daniel Luecking, and the other |
|
4542 % gurus at comp.text.tex, for helping me to understand how best to |
|
4543 % implement the IEEEpubid command in LaTeX. |
|
4544 |
|
4545 |
|
4546 |
|
4547 %% Lockout some commands under various conditions |
|
4548 |
|
4549 % general purpose bit bucket |
|
4550 \newsavebox{\@IEEEtranrubishbin} |
|
4551 |
|
4552 % flags to prevent multiple warning messages |
|
4553 \newif\if@IEEEWARNthanks |
|
4554 \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart |
|
4555 \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography |
|
4556 \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto |
|
4557 \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid |
|
4558 \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol |
|
4559 \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership |
|
4560 \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext |
|
4561 \@IEEEWARNthankstrue |
|
4562 \@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstarttrue |
|
4563 \@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographytrue |
|
4564 \@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophototrue |
|
4565 \@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidtrue |
|
4566 \@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcoltrue |
|
4567 \@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershiptrue |
|
4568 \@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletexttrue |
|
4569 |
|
4570 |
|
4571 %% Lockout some commands when in various modes, but allow them to be restored if needed |
|
4572 %% |
|
4573 % save commands which might be locked out |
|
4574 % so that the user can later restore them if needed |
|
4575 \let\@IEEESAVECMDthanks\thanks |
|
4576 \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart\IEEEPARstart |
|
4577 \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography\IEEEbiography |
|
4578 \let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography\endIEEEbiography |
|
4579 \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto\IEEEbiographynophoto |
|
4580 \let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto\endIEEEbiographynophoto |
|
4581 \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid\IEEEpubid |
|
4582 \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol\IEEEpubidadjcol |
|
4583 \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership\IEEEmembership |
|
4584 \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext\IEEEaftertitletext |
|
4585 |
|
4586 |
|
4587 % disable \IEEEPARstart when in draft mode |
|
4588 % This may have originally been done because the pre-V1.6 drop letter |
|
4589 % algorithm had problems with a non-unity baselinestretch |
|
4590 % At any rate, it seems too formal to have a drop letter in a draft |
|
4591 % paper. |
|
4592 \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
|
4593 \def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** ATTENTION: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart |
|
4594 is disabled in draft mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse} |
|
4595 \fi |
|
4596 % and for technotes |
|
4597 \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote |
|
4598 \def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart |
|
4599 is locked out for technotes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse} |
|
4600 \fi |
|
4601 |
|
4602 |
|
4603 % lockout unneeded commands when in conference mode |
|
4604 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
|
4605 % when locked out, \thanks, \IEEEbiography, \IEEEbiographynophoto, \IEEEpubid, |
|
4606 % \IEEEmembership and \IEEEaftertitletext will all swallow their given text. |
|
4607 % \IEEEPARstart will output a normal character instead |
|
4608 % warn the user about these commands only once to prevent the console screen |
|
4609 % from filling up with redundant messages |
|
4610 \def\thanks#1{\if@IEEEWARNthanks\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\thanks |
|
4611 is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNthanksfalse} |
|
4612 \def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart |
|
4613 is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse} |
|
4614 |
|
4615 |
|
4616 % LaTeX treats environments and commands with optional arguments differently. |
|
4617 % the actual ("internal") command is stored as \\commandname |
|
4618 % (accessed via \csname\string\commandname\endcsname ) |
|
4619 % the "external" command \commandname is a macro with code to determine |
|
4620 % whether or not the optional argument is presented and to provide the |
|
4621 % default if it is absent. So, in order to save and restore such a command |
|
4622 % we would have to save and restore \\commandname as well. But, if LaTeX |
|
4623 % ever changes the way it names the internal names, the trick would break. |
|
4624 % Instead let us just define a new environment so that the internal |
|
4625 % name can be left undisturbed. |
|
4626 \newenvironment{@IEEEbogusbiography}[2][]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiography |
|
4627 is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographyfalse% |
|
4628 \setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax} |
|
4629 % and make biography point to our bogus biography |
|
4630 \let\IEEEbiography=\@IEEEbogusbiography |
|
4631 \let\endIEEEbiography=\end@IEEEbogusbiography |
|
4632 |
|
4633 \renewenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiographynophoto |
|
4634 is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophotofalse% |
|
4635 \setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax} |
|
4636 |
|
4637 \def\IEEEpubid#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubid |
|
4638 is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidfalse} |
|
4639 \def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubidadjcol |
|
4640 is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcolfalse} |
|
4641 \def\IEEEmembership#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEmembership |
|
4642 is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershipfalse} |
|
4643 \def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEaftertitletext |
|
4644 is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletextfalse} |
|
4645 \fi |
|
4646 |
|
4647 |
|
4648 % provide a way to restore the commands that are locked out |
|
4649 \def\IEEEoverridecommandlockouts{% |
|
4650 \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding command lockouts (line \the\inputlineno).}% |
|
4651 \let\thanks\@IEEESAVECMDthanks% |
|
4652 \let\IEEEPARstart\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart% |
|
4653 \let\IEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography% |
|
4654 \let\endIEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography% |
|
4655 \let\IEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto% |
|
4656 \let\endIEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto% |
|
4657 \let\IEEEpubid\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid% |
|
4658 \let\IEEEpubidadjcol\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol% |
|
4659 \let\IEEEmembership\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership% |
|
4660 \let\IEEEaftertitletext\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext} |
|
4661 |
|
4662 |
|
4663 |
|
4664 % need a backslash character for typeout output |
|
4665 {\catcode`\|=0 \catcode`\\=12 |
|
4666 |xdef|@IEEEbackslash{\}} |
|
4667 |
|
4668 |
|
4669 % hook to allow easy disabling of all legacy warnings |
|
4670 \def\@IEEElegacywarn#1#2{\typeout{** ATTENTION: \@IEEEbackslash #1 is deprecated (line \the\inputlineno). |
|
4671 Use \@IEEEbackslash #2 instead.}} |
|
4672 |
|
4673 |
|
4674 % provide for legacy commands |
|
4675 \def\authorblockA{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockA}{IEEEauthorblockA}\IEEEauthorblockA} |
|
4676 \def\authorblockN{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockN}{IEEEauthorblockN}\IEEEauthorblockN} |
|
4677 \def\authorrefmark{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorrefmark}{IEEEauthorrefmark}\IEEEauthorrefmark} |
|
4678 \def\PARstart{\@IEEElegacywarn{PARstart}{IEEEPARstart}\IEEEPARstart} |
|
4679 \def\pubid{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubid}{IEEEpubid}\IEEEpubid} |
|
4680 \def\pubidadjcol{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubidadjcol}{IEEEpubidadjcol}\IEEEpubidadjcol} |
|
4681 \def\QED{\@IEEElegacywarn{QED}{IEEEQED}\IEEEQED} |
|
4682 \def\QEDclosed{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDclosed}{IEEEQEDclosed}\IEEEQEDclosed} |
|
4683 \def\QEDopen{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDopen}{IEEEQEDopen}\IEEEQEDopen} |
|
4684 \def\specialpapernotice{\@IEEElegacywarn{specialpapernotice}{IEEEspecialpapernotice}\IEEEspecialpapernotice} |
|
4685 |
|
4686 |
|
4687 |
|
4688 % provide for legacy environments |
|
4689 \def\biography{\@IEEElegacywarn{biography}{IEEEbiography}\IEEEbiography} |
|
4690 \def\biographynophoto{\@IEEElegacywarn{biographynophoto}{IEEEbiographynophoto}\IEEEbiographynophoto} |
|
4691 \def\keywords{\@IEEElegacywarn{keywords}{IEEEkeywords}\IEEEkeywords} |
|
4692 \def\endbiography{\endIEEEbiography} |
|
4693 \def\endbiographynophoto{\endIEEEbiographynophoto} |
|
4694 \def\endkeywords{\endIEEEkeywords} |
|
4695 |
|
4696 |
|
4697 % provide for legacy IED commands/lengths when possible |
|
4698 \let\labelindent\IEEElabelindent |
|
4699 \def\calcleftmargin{\@IEEElegacywarn{calcleftmargin}{IEEEcalcleftmargin}\IEEEcalcleftmargin} |
|
4700 \def\setlabelwidth{\@IEEElegacywarn{setlabelwidth}{IEEEsetlabelwidth}\IEEEsetlabelwidth} |
|
4701 \def\usemathlabelsep{\@IEEElegacywarn{usemathlabelsep}{IEEEusemathlabelsep}\IEEEusemathlabelsep} |
|
4702 \def\iedlabeljustifyc{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyc}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyc}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc} |
|
4703 \def\iedlabeljustifyl{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyl}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyl}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl} |
|
4704 \def\iedlabeljustifyr{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyr}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyr}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr} |
|
4705 |
|
4706 |
|
4707 |
|
4708 % let \proof use the IEEEtran version even after amsthm is loaded |
|
4709 % \proof is now deprecated in favor of \IEEEproof |
|
4710 \AtBeginDocument{\def\proof{\@IEEElegacywarn{proof}{IEEEproof}\IEEEproof}\def\endproof{\endIEEEproof}} |
|
4711 |
|
4712 % V1.7 \overrideIEEEmargins is no longer supported. |
|
4713 \def\overrideIEEEmargins{% |
|
4714 \typeout{** WARNING: \string\overrideIEEEmargins \space no longer supported (line \the\inputlineno).}% |
|
4715 \typeout{** Use the \string\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin, \string\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin \space controls instead.}} |
|
4716 |
|
4717 |
|
4718 \endinput |
|
4719 |
|
4720 %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of IEEEtran.cls %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% |
|
4721 % That's all folks! |
|
4722 |